AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Electromagnetic Induction Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Electromagnetic Induction

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What did the experiments of Faraday and Henry show?
Answer:
The discovery and understanding of electromagnetic induction are based on a long series of experiments carried out by Faraday and Henry.

Question 2.
Define magnetic flux.
Answer:
Magnetic flux is defined as the number of magnetic lines of force crossing through the surface.
ϕB = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = BA cos θ
C.G.S unit → Maxwell
S.I. unit → Weber (wb)
Magnetic flux is a scalar.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction

Question 3.
State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
Answer:
“Magnitude of induced e.m.f is directly proportional to the rate of change of magnetic flux”
ε ∝ \(-\frac{d \phi}{d t}\)

Question 4.
State Lenz’s law.
Answer:
The direction of induced e.m.f (or) current is such that it opposes the cause which produce it. Lenz’s law is in accordance with law of conservation of energy.

Question 5.
What happens to the mechanical energy (of motion) .when a conductor is moved in a uniform magnetic field ?
Answer:
Motional e.m.f is produced to the motion of the conductor,in a magnetic field.
Motion e.m.f (ε) = Blυ

Question 6.
What are Eddy currents ? (T.S. Mar. ’19; A.P. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Eddy currents (or) Foucault currents : The induced circulating currents produced in a conductor itself due to change in magnetic flux linked with the conductor are called Eddy currents.
Due to Eddy currents, the energy is dissipated in the form of heat energy.

Question 7.
Define ‘inductance’.
Answer:
Inductance is a coefficient of electromagnetic induction and is an intrinsic property of a material just like capacitance.
Inductance is an important scalar quantity which depends upon the geometry (i.e, dimensions) of a coil.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction

Question 8.
What do you understand by ‘self inductance’ ?
Answer:
Self inductance of a coil is defined as the induced e.m.f produced in the coil through which the rate of change of current is unity.
ε = \(-\mathrm{L} \frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ; ε = -L, If \(\frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 1 A/s.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Obtain an expression for the emf induced across a conductor which is moved in a uniform magnetic field which is perpendicular to the plane of motion.
Answer:
Consider a conductor PQ of length l moving freely in a uniform magnetic field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) with uniform velocity u on a rectangular conductor ABCD. Let any arbitrary charge q in the conductor also move in the field with same velocity.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 1
Magnitude of Lorentz force on this charge (F) = Bqυ —– (1)
Workdone in moving the charge from P to Q is given by
W = Force × displacement
W = Bqυ × l —– (2) (∵ Direction of force on the charge as per Fleming’s left hand rule)
Electromotive force (ε) = \(\frac{W}{Q}\)
ε = \(\frac{\mathrm{Bqv} l}{\mathrm{q}}\) ⇒ ε = Blυ —- (3)

Question 2.
Describe the ways in which Eddy currents are used to advantage. (A.P. Mar. ’16, AP & T.S. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Eddy currents are used to advantage in

  1. Magnetic braking in trains : A strong magnetic field is applied across the metallic drum rotating with the axle of the electric train. Thus large eddy currents are produced in the metallic drum. These currents oppose the motion of the drum and hence the axle of the train which ultimately makes the train come to rest.
  2. Induction Motor: Eddy currents are used to rotate the short circuited rotor of an induction motor. Ceiling fans are also induction motors which run on single phase alternating current.
  3. Electromagnetic damping : Certain galvanometers have a fixed core made of non magnetic metallic material. When the coil oscillates, the eddy currents generated in the core oppose the motion and bring the coil to rest quickly.
  4. Induction furnace : Induction furnace can be used to produce high temperatures and can be utilised to prepare alloys, by melting the constituent metals. A high frequency alternating current is passed through a coil. The eddy currents generated in the metals produce high temperatures sufficient to melt it.
  5. Analogue energy meters : Concept of eddy currents is used in energy meters to record
    the consumption of electricity. Aluminium disc used in these meters get induced due to varying magnetic field. It rotates due to eddy currents produced in it.

Question 3.
Obtain an expression for the mutual inductance of two long co-axial solenoids. (A.P. Mar. ’19)
Answer:
Consider two solenoids as shown in figure. The length of primary coil be l and are a of cross section A. Let N1 and N2 are the total number of turns in the primary and secondary solenoids. Let n1 and n2 be the number of turns per unit length
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 2
(n1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_1}{l}\) and n2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_2}{l}\)). Current in the primary coil is i.
∴ Magnetic field inside the primary (B) = μ0n1 I = μ0\(\frac{\mathrm{N}_1}{l}\) I —– (1)
Magnetic flux through each turn of primary
ϕB = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = μ0\(\frac{\mathrm{N}_1}{l} \mathrm{I} \times \mathrm{A}\) —— (2)

The same magnetic flux is linked with the secondary coil.
∴ Total magnetic flux linked with secondary = μ0\(\frac{\mathrm{N}_1 \mathrm{i}}{l} \times \mathrm{A} \times \mathrm{N}_2\) ——– (3)
If M be mutual inductance of the two coils, the total flux linked with the secondary is Mi
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 4

Question 4.
Obtain an expression for the magnetic energy stored a solenoid in terms of the magnetic field, area and length of the solenoid.
Answer:
When the current flows through the inductor of inductance L, an e.m.f is induced in it is given by
ε = -L\(\frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) —– (1)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 5
(-ve sign shows that e.m.f opposes the passage of current)
Let an infinite small charge dq be driven through the inductor. So the work done by the external voltage is given by
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 6
Total work done to maintain the maximum current (I0) is given by
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 7
This work done is stored in the form of potential energy in the magnetic field (U)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 8
In case of solenoid B = μ0nI0 (or) I0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{B}}{\mu_0 \mathrm{n}}\) and L = μ0n2Al
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 9

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Outline the path-breaking experiments of Faraday and Henry and highlight the contributions of these experiments to our understanding of electromagnetism.
Answer:
Faraday’s and Henry’s experiments :

Experiment 1: A magnet induces current due to relative motion

  1. The apparatus consists of a coil with a galvanometer G and a bar magnet.
  2. When the bar magnet (NS) was at rest, the galvanometer shows no deflection.
  3. When North pole of the bar magnet moved towards the coil, galvanometer shows the deflection in one direction indicating the flow of current in the coil.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 10
  4. When North pole of the bar magnet moved away from the coil, galvanometer again showed the deflection but now in the opposite direction.
  5. The deflection of the galvanometer was large when the bar magnet was moved faster towards (or) away from the coil.
  6. When south pole of the magnet was brought near the coil (or) moved away from the coil, the deflections in the galvanometer are opposite to that observed with the north pole for similar movements.

Conclusion:

  1. Whenever there is a relative motion between a coil and a magnet, induced current flows through the coil.
  2. Large induced e.m.f. (or) current is produced in the coil if the relative motion between magnet and the coil is large.

Experiment 2 : Current induces current due to relative motion of coils :
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 11

  1. The bar magnet is replaced by a secondary coil C2 connected to a battery as shown in figure.
  2. The steady current in the coil C2 produces a steady magnetic field.
  3. As coil C2 is moved towards the coil C1, the galvanometer shows a deflection. This indicates current is induced in the coil C1.
  4. When coil C2 is moved away, the galvanometer shows a deflection again, but opposite direction.
  5. The deflection lasts as long as coil C2 is in motion.
  6. When the coil C2 is held fixed and C1 is moved, the same effects are observed.

Conclusion : Induced e.m.f (or) current is produced, when there is a relative motion between the coils.

Experiment 3: Changing current, Induces current without relative motion:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 12

  1. Faraday showed that this relative motion is not an absolute requirement.
  2. Figure shows two coils C1 and C2 held stationary.
  3. Coil C1 is connected to a battery through a tap key K and coil C2 is connected to a galvanometer (G).
  4. it is observed that the galvanometer shows a momentary deflection when the tap key K is pressed.
  5. The pointer in the galvanometer returns to zero immediately.
  6. If the key is held pressed continuously, there is no deflection in the galvanometer.
  7. When the key is released, the galvanometer shows deflection again but in the opposite direction.
  8. Deflection of the galvanometer increases a lot when wooden bar is replaced by iron bar.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction

Question 2.
Describe the working of a AC generator with the aid of a simple diagram and necessary expressions.
Answer:
“An electrical machine used to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy is known as A.C generator/altemator”.
Principle : It works on the principle of electromagnetic induction.

Construction :

  1. Armature : Armature coil (ABCD) consists of a large number of turns of insulated copper wire wound over a soft iron core.
  2. Strong field magnet : A strong permanent magnet (or) an electromagnet whose poles (N and S) are cylindrical in shape used as a field magnet. The armature coil rotates between the pole pieces of the field magnet.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 13
  3. Slip rings: The two ends of the armature coil are connected to two brass slip rings R1 and R2. These rings rotate along with the armature coil.
  4. Brushes : Two carbon brushes B1 and B2 are pressed against the slip rings. The brushes remain fixed while slip rings rotate along with the armature. These brushes are connected to the load through which the out put is obtained.

Working : When the armature coil ABCD rotates is the magnetic field provided by the strong field magnet, it cuts the magnetic line of force. The magnetic flux linked with the coil changes due to the rotation of the armature and hence induced e.m.f is set up in the coil.

The current flows out through the brush B in one direction of half of revolution and through the brush B2 in the next half revolution in the reverse direction. This process is repeated, therefore e.m.f produced is of alternating nature.

Theory:

  1. When the coil is rotated with a constant angular velocity (ω)
  2. The angle between the normal to the coil and magnetic field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) at any instant is given by θ = ωt —— (1)
  3. The component of magnetic field normal to the plane of the coil = B cos θ = B cosωt —— (2)
  4. Magnetic flux linked with the single turn of the coil = (B cos ωt) A —— (3)
    where A is the area of the coil, if the coil has n turns
  5. Total magnetic flux linked with the coil (ϕ) = n(B cos ωt) A —– (4)
    According to Faraday’s law,

ε = \(-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)(nBA cos ωt) = -nBA(-ω sin ωt)
ε = nBA ω sin ωt —— (5)
Where nBAω is the maximum value of e.m.f. (ε0)
ε = ε0 sin ωt —– (6) (∵ ω = 2πυ)

Instantaneous current is the circuit is given by
I = \(\frac{\varepsilon}{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\frac{\varepsilon_0}{\mathrm{R}}\) sin ωt [∵ i = \(\frac{\varepsilon_0}{\mathrm{R}}\)]
I = I0 sin ωt
The direction of the current changes periodically and therefore the current is called alternating current (a.c.).

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
Predict the direction of induced current in the situations described by the following (a) to (f).
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 14
Answer:
a) Here south pole is moving towards the coil, so according to Lenz’s law this end becomes s-pole. (To oppose the motion of south pole by repelling it). Hence, the direction of current is clockwise (by using clock rule) and the current flows from p to q.

b) In coil p-q at the end q ⇒ s-pole is moving towards end q, so it behaves like a south pole (by lenz’s law). The direction of current is clockwise (by clock rule) i.e. from p to q. North pole is moving away so this end will behave like south pole (To oppose its away motion by attracting it). In coil x-y, S-pole is induced (by Lenz’s law) and the direction of current is clockwise i.e. x to y.

c) As the tapping key is just, closed, the current in coil increases so, the magnetic flux and field increases. According to Maxwell’s right hand grip rule, the direction of magnetic field is left wards. Thus, the direction of induced current in the neighbouring coil is such that it try to decrease the field, thus the direction of field in the neighbouring coil should be rightwards i.e., according to Maxwell’s right hand rule the direction of induced current is anti clock wise i.e. xyz.

d) As the rheostat setting is changed, the current is changed. The direction of field due to the coil is leftwards according to Maxwell’s right hand grip rule. The direction of induced current in the left coil is such that the magnetic field produced by it in rightwards, thus the direction of current in left coil is Anticlockwise i.e from zyx.

e) As the key is just released, the current which is flowing anticlockwise goes on decreasing. Thus, the induced current developed in such a sense the magnetic field due to left coil increases (which is towards right). So, the magnetic field due to the right coil should also towards right and hence the induced current is in anticlockwise, i.e., x to yx – direction.

f) The magnetic field lines due to the current carrying wire are in the plane of the loop. Hence, no induced current is produced in the loop (because no flux lines crosses the area of loop).

Question 2.
Use Lenz’s law to determine the direction of induced current in the situations described by fig. a, b.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 15
(a) A wire of irregular shape turning into a circular shape.
(b) A circular loop being deformed into a narrow straight wire.
Answer:
a) Here, the direction of magnetic field is perpendicularly inwards to the plane of paper. If a wire of irregular shape turns into a circular shape then its area increases (∵ the circular loop has greater area than the loop of irregular shape) so that the magnetic flux linked also increases. Now, the induced current is produced in a direction such that it decreases the magnetic field (i.e.) the current will flow in such a direction so that the wire forming the loop is pulled inwards in all directions (to decreases the area) i.e., current is in anticlockwise direction, i.e., adcba

b) When a circular loop deforms into a narrow straight wire, the magnetic flux linked with it also decreases. The current induced due to change in flux will flow in such a direction that it will oppose the decrease in magnetic flux so it will flow anti clockwise i.e along a’d’c’b’a’, due to which the magnetic field produced will be out of the plane of paper.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction

Question 3.
A long solenoid with 15 turns per cm has a small loop of area 2.0 cm2 placed inside the solenoid normal to its axis. If the current carried by the solenoid changes steadily from 2.0 A to 4.0 A in 0.1 s, what is the induced emf in the loop while the current is changing ?
Solution:
Given number of turns (n) = 15 per cm = 1500 per metre. .
Area of small loop A = 2 cm2 = 2 × 10-4m2
Change in current \(\frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{4-2}{0.1}\) = \(\frac{2}{0.1}\) = 20 A/s
Let e be the induced emf, According to Faraday’s law,
e = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)(BA) or e = \(\text { A. } \frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) (∵ ϕ = BA)
e = A. \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}\left(\mu_0 \mathrm{nI}\right)\) (∵ Magnetic field inside the solenoid B = μ0nI)
or e = Aμ0n\(\frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
e = 2 × 10-4 × 4 × 3.14 × 10-7 × 1500 × 20
e = 7.5 × 106v (∵ μ0 = 4π × 10-7) Thus, the induced emf in the loop is 7.5 × 106V.

Question 4.
A rectangular wire loop of sides 8 cm and 2 cm with a small cut is moving out of region of uniform magnetic field of magnitude 0.3 T directed normal to the loop. What is the emf developed across the cut if the velocity of the loop is 1 cm s-1 in a direction normal to the (a) longer side, (b) shorter side of the loop ? For how long does the induced voltage last in each case ?
Solution:
Given length of the loop l = 8 cm = 8 × 10-2 m.
Width of the loop b = 2 cm = 2 × 10-2 m.
Velocity of the loop = 1 cm/s = 0.01 m/s.
Magnitude of magnetic field (B) = 0.3
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 16
a) When velocity is normal to the longer side .
(l = 8 cm = 8 × 10-2 m)
In this case, motional emf
e = B/υ = 0.3 × 8 × 10-2 × 0.01 = 2.4 × 10-4 V
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 17

b) When velocity is normal to the shorter side
(l = 2cm = 2 × 10-2 m)
In this case, the developed emf
e = Blυ = 0.3 × 2 × 10-2 × 0.01
e = 0.6 × 10-4 V.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 19
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 18

Question 5.
A 1.0 m long metallic rod is rotated with an angular frequency of 400 rad s-1 about an axis normal to the rod passing through its one end. The other end of the rod is in contact with a circular metallic ring. A constant and uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T parallel to the axis exists everywhere. Calculate the emf developed between the centre and the ring.
Solution:
Length of rod l = 1 m
Angular frequency of rod ω = 400 rad/s
Magnetic field B = 0.5 T
The linear velocity of fixed end = 0
The linear velocity of other end = lω (∵ V = rω)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 20
Average linear velocity V = \(\frac{0+l \omega}{2}\)
V = \(\frac{l \omega}{2}\) —– (i) By using the formula of motional emf,
e = Bυl = \(\frac{\mathrm{B} l \omega}{2}\) (from equation (i)), e = \(\frac{0.5 \times 1 \times 400 \times 1}{2}\), e = 100.
Thus, the emf developed between the centre and ring is 100 V

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction

Question 6.
A circular coil of radius 8.0 cm and 20 turns is rotated about its vertical diameter with an angular speed of 50 rad s-1 in a uniform horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 3.0 × 10-2 T. Obtain the maximum and average emf induced in the coil. If the coil forms a closed loop of resistance 10Ω, calculate the maximum value of current in the coil. Calculate the average power loss due to Joule heating. Where does this power come from ?
Solution:
Given radius of coil = 8 cm = 0.08 m, Number of turns = 20
Resistance of closed loop = 10Ω, Angular speed ω = 50 rad/s
Magnitude of magnetic field B = 3 × 10-2 T
Induced emf produced in the coil e = NBA W sin ωt
For maximum emf, sin ωt = 1
∴ Maximum emf e0 = NBAω
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 21
The source of power dissipated as heat in the coil is the external rotar. The current induced in the coil causes a torque which opposes the rotation of the coil, so the external agent rotar counter this torque to keep the coil rotating uniformly.

Question 7.
A horizontal straight wire 10 m long extending from east to west is falling with a speed of 5.0 m s-1, at right angles to the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field, 0.30 × 10-4 Wb m2.
(a) What is the instantaneous value of the emf induced in the wire ?
(b) What is the direction of the emf ?
(c) Which end of the wire is at the higher electrical potential ?
Solution:
Given, velocity of straight wire = 5 m/s
Magnetic field of straight wire,
B = 0.30 × 10-4 Wb/m2
length of wire l = 10m
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 22
a) Emf induced in the wire e = B/υsin θ
Here, θ = 90°
∴ sin θ = 1 .
(∴ wire is falling at right angle to earth’s horizontal magnetic field component)
= 0.3 × 10-4 × 10 × 5 = 1.5 × 10-3 V.

b) According to the Fleming’s right hand rule, the force is downward, then the direction of induced emf will be from west to east.

c) As the direction of induced emf or current is from west to east, the west end of the wire is at higher potential.
(∵ current always flows from a point at higher potential to a point at lower potential).

Question 8.
Current in a circuit falls from 5.0 A to 0.0 A in 0.1 s. If an average emf of 200 V induced, give an estimate of the self-inductance of the circuit. (T.S. Mar. ’16, Mar. ’14)
Solution:
Change in current, dI = 5 – 0 = 5A, Time taken in current change dt = 0.1 s
Induced average emf eav = 200 V
Induced emf in the circuit e = L. \(\frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ⇒ 200 = L\(\left(\frac{5}{0.1}\right)\) or L = \(\frac{200}{50}\) = 4H

Question 9.
A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1.5 H. If the current in one coil changes from 0 to 20 A in 0.5 s, what is the change of flux linkage with the other coil ?
Solution:
Given, mutual inductance of coil M = 1.5 H, Current change in coil dl = 20 – 0 = 20 A
Time taken in change dt = 0.5s, Induced emf in the coil e = M\(\frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
dϕ = M.dl = 1.5 × 20, dϕ = 30 Wb, Thus the change of flux linkage is 30 Wb.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction

Question 10.
A jet plane is travelling towards west at a speed of 1800 km/h. What is the voltage difference developed between the ends of the wing having a span of 25 m, if the Earth’s magnetic field at the location has a magnitude of 5 × 10-4 T and the dip angle is 30°.
Solution:
Speed of jet plane V = 1800 km/h = 1800 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 500 m/s
l = Distance between the ends of wings = 25 m
The magnitude of magnetic field B = 5 × 10-4 T
Angle of dip γ = 30°.
Use the formula of motional emf
e = BvVl, e = B sin γ Vl (Bv = B sin γ),
e = 5 × 10-4 × sin 30° × 500 × 25, e = 3.1 V
Thus, the voltage difference developed between the ends is 3.1 V

Additional Question

Question 1.
Obtain an expression for the self inductance of a solenoid.
Answer:
i) Consider a long solenoid of length l, area of cross-section A. Let n be the number of turns per unit length (n = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{l}\))

ii) Let i be the current flows through it. The magnetic field inside the solenoid is given by
B = μ0ni —— (1)

iii) Magnetic flux linked with each turn of the solenoid = B.A = μ0niA —— (2)

iv) Total magnetic flux linked with whole solenoid
ϕ = μ0niA × N (∵ N = nl)
ϕ = μ0ni A × nl (Where N Total number of turns in the solenoid)
ϕ = μ0n2iAl —— (3) Also, ϕ = Li —– (4) From eq’s (3) & (4), Li = μ0n2iAl
L = μ0n2Al —– (5) (or) L = μ0\(\frac{\mathrm{N}^2}{l}\)A —– (6)

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
Suppose the loop in Textual Exercise 4 is stationary but the current feeding the electromagnet that produces the magnetic field is gradually reduced so that the field decreases from its initial value of 0.3 T at the rate of 0.02 T s-1. If the cut is joined and the loop has a resistance of 1.6Ω how much power is dissipated by the loop as heat ? What is the source of this power ?
Solution:
Area of loop = 8 × 2 = 16 cm2
Rate of change of magnetic field \(\frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 0.02 T/S,
Resistance of loop R = 1.6Ω
Induced emf of loop e = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}(\mathrm{BA})\) (∵ ϕ = BA)
e = A. \(\frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ⇒ e = 16 × 10-4 × 0.02 ⇒ e = 0.32 × 10-4V
Induced current in the loop I = \(\frac{e}{R}\) = \(\frac{0.32 \times 10^{-4}}{1.6}\) = 0.2 × 10-4A
Power of source as heat P = I2R = (0.2 × 10-4)2 × 1.6 = 6.4 × 10-10 W ⇒ P = 6.4 × 10-10W
The agency which changing the magnetic field with time is the source of this power.

Question 2.
A square loop of side 12 cm with its sides parallel to X and Y axes is moved with a velocity of 8 cm s-1 in the positive x-direction in an environment containing a magnetic field in the positive z-direction. The field is neither uniform in space nor constant in time. It has a gradient of 10-3 T cm-1 along the negative x-direction (that is it increases by 10-3 T cm-1 as one moves in the negative x-direction), and it is decreasing in time at the rate of 10-3 Ts-1. Determine the direction and magnitude of the induced current in the loop if its resistance is 4.50 mΩ.
Solution:
Given, side of loop a = 12 cm
∴ Area of loop (A) = a2 = (12)2 = 144 cm2 = 144 × 10-4 m2 (∵ Area of square = (side)2)
Velocity v = 8 cm/s = 8 × 10-2 m/s.
Rate of change of magnetic field with distance \(\frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dx}}\) = 10-3 T/cm
Rate of change of magnetic field with time \(\frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 10-3 T/s
Resistance of the loop R = 4.5 mΩ = 4.5 × 10-3Ω
Rate of change of magnetic flux with respect to time
\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}(\mathrm{BA})}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right) \mathrm{A}\) = 10-3 × 144 × 10-4
= 1.44 × 10-5 Wb/s
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 23
Rate of change of magnetic flux due to the motion of loop
\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{dB}}{\mathrm{dx}} \cdot \mathrm{A} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 10-3 × 144 × 10-4 × 8 = 11.52 × 10-5 Wb/s
Both of the effects cause a decrease in magnetic flux along the positive z-direction.
Total induced emf in the loop e = 1.44 × 10-5 + 11.52 × 10-5
e = 12.96 × 10-5 V
Induced current in the loop = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\frac{12.96 \times 10^{-5}}{4.5 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 2.88 × 10-2A.
The direction of induced current is such as to increase the flux through the loop along positive z-direction.

Question 3.
It is desired to measure the magnitude of field between the poles of a powerful loud speaker magnet. A small flat search coil of area 2 cm2 with 25 closely wound turns, is positioned normal to the field direction and then quickly snatched out of the field region. Equivalently, one can give it a quick 90° turn to bring its plane parallel to the field direction). The total charge flown in the coil (measured by a ballistic galvanometer connected to coil) is 7.5 mC. The combined resistance of the coil and the galvanometer is 0.50Ω Estimate the field strength of magnet.
Solution:
Area of coil A = 2cm2 = 2 × 10-4 m2, Number of turns N = 25
Total charge in the coil θ = 7.5 mC (1 mC = 10-3 C) = 7.5 × 10-3 C
Resistance of coil R = 0.5Ω
When the coil is removed from the field, the flux is zero ϕf = 0. Induced current in the coil
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 24
Thus, the strength of magnetic field is 0.75 T.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction

Question 4.
Following figure shows a metal rod PQ resting on the smooth rails AB and positioned between the poles of a permanent magnet. The rails, the rod and the magnetic field are in three mutual perpendicular directions. A galvanometer G connects the rails through a switch K. Length of the rod = 15 cm, B = 0.50 T, resistance of the closed loop containing the rod = 9.0 mΩ. Assume the field to be uniform.
(a) Suppose K is open and the rod is moved with a speed of 12 cm s-1 in the direction shown. Give the polarity and magnitude of the induced emf.
(b) Is there an excess charge built up at the ends of the rods when K is open ? What if K is closed ?
(c) With K open and the rod moving uniformly, there is no net force on the electrons in the rod PQ even though they do experience magnetic force due to the motion of the rod. Explain.
(d) What is the retarding force on the rod when K is closed ?
(e) How much power is required (by an external agent) to keep the rod moving at the same speed (= 12 cm s-1) when K is closed ? How much power is required when K is open ?
(f) How much power is dissipated as heat in the closed circuit ? What is source of this power ?
(g) What is the induced emf in the moving rod if the magnetic field is parallel to the rails instead of being perpendicular ?
Solution:
Given, length of the rod l = 15 cm = 15 × 10-2, Magnetic field B = 0.50 T
Resistance of the closed – loop containing the rod, R = 9mΩ ⇒ 9 × 10-3Ω
Velocity of rod V = 12 cm/s = 12 × 10-2 m/s,
a) The magnitude of the motional emf
e = BVl = 0.50 × 12 × 10-2 × 15 × 10-2, e = 9 × 10-3 V.
According to the Fleming’s left hand rule, the direction of Lorentz force (f = -e(V × B)) on electrons in PQ is from P to Q. So, p would acquire positive charge and Q would acquire negative charge.

b) Yes, an excess positive charge developes at P and the same amount of negative charge developes at Q as the key is open. When the key K is closed, the induced current flows and maintains the excess charge.

c) When key is open, there is no net force on the electrons because the presence of excess charge at P and Q sets up an electric field and magnetic force on the electrons is balanced by force on them due to force by the electric field. So, there is no net force on the rod.

d) When the key K is closed, current flow in the loop and the current carrying wise experience a retarding force in the magnetic field which is given by
Force = BIl = B . \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{R}}\) . l = \(\frac{0.5 \times 9 \times 10^{-3} \times 15 \times 10^{-12}}{9 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 7.5 × 10-2 N.

e) To keep the rod moving at the same speed the required power
= retarding force × velocity = 7.5 × 10-2 × 12 × 10-2 = 9 × 10-3 W

f) Power dissipated in closed circuit due to flow of current = I2R
= \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2\) × R = \(\frac{\left(9 \times 10^{-3}\right)^2}{9 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 9 × 10-3 W2 The source of this power is the external agent.

g) When the field is parallel to length of rails θ = 0°, induced emf = e = BVl sin θ = 0 (∵ sin θ° = 0). In this situation, the moving rod will not cut the field lines so that flux change is zero and hence induced emf is zero.

Question 5.
An air-cored solenoid with length 30 cm, area of cross-section 25 cm2 and number of turns 500, carries a current of 2.5 A. The current is suddenly switched off in a brief time of 10-3s. How much is the average back emf induced across the ends of the open switch in the circuit? Ignore the variation in magnetic field near the ends of the solenoid.
Solution:
Given, length of solenoid I = 30 cm = 30 × 10-2 m
Area of cross-section A = 25 cm2 = 25 × 10-4 m2
Number of turns N = 500, Current I1 = 2.5A, I2 = 0, Brief time dt = 10-3s.
Induced emf in the solenoid e = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}(\mathrm{BA})}{\mathrm{dt}}\) (∵ ϕ = BA)
Magnetic field induction B at a point well inside the long solenoid carring current I is
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 25

Question 6.
Obtain an expression for the mutual inductance between a long straight wire and a square loop of side a as shown in the figure.
(b) Now assume that the straight wire carries a current of 50 A and the loop is moved to the right with a constant velocity, υ = 10 m/s. Calculate the induced emf in the loop at the instant when x = 0.2 m.
Take α = 0.1 m and assume that the loop has a large resistance.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 26
Solution:
a) Let us assume that an elementary strip of width dx a at distance x from the wire carring current I.
Side of square = a.
The magnetic field due to current carring wire at a distance x from the wire is
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 I}{x}\) —— (i)
Small amount of magnetic flux associated with the strip
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 27
As we know that ϕ = MI —— (iii)
where, M is mutual inductance. From equations (ii) and (iii) we get
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 32
This is mutual inductance between wire and square loop.

b) Given current I = 50 A, Velocity V = 10 m/s, x = 0.2 m and a = 0.1 m
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 28

Question 7.
A line charge λ per unit length is lodged uniformly onto the rim of a wheel of mass M and radius R. The wheel has light non-conducting spokes and is free to rotate without friction about its axis (figure). A uniform magnetic field extends over a circular region within the rim. It is given by,
B = B0k (r ≤ a, a < R)
= 0 (otherwise)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 29
What is the angular velocity of the wheel after the field is suddenly switched off?
Solution:
Given Linear charge density
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 30
Radius of rim = R,
Mass of rim = M,
Magnetic field extends over a circular region
B = -B0 (r ≤ a, a < R) = O (otherwise).
Let the angular velocity of the wheel be w, then induced emf e = \(\frac{-\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
E exist along circumference of radius a due to change in magnetic flux.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Induction 31

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 8th Lesson Magnetism and Matter Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 8th Lesson Magnetism and Matter

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
A magnetic dipole placed in a magnetic field experiences a net force. What can you say about the nature of the magnetic field?
Answer:
The nature of the magnetic field is uniform, magnetic dipole (bar magnet) experiences a net force (or torque).

Question 2.
What happens to compass needles at the Earth’s poles?
Answer:
At the poles, the earth’s field is exactly vertical. So, the compass needles are free to rotate in a horizontal plane only, it may point out in any direction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 3.
What do you understand by the ‘magnetization’ of a sample? (A.P. Mar. ’16)
Answer:
When a magnetic sample is placed in a magnetic field, its magnetic moments add up in the direction of the magnetic field. Hence the sample get a net magnetic moment (mnet ≠ 0)
Magnetisation is defined as the net magnetic moment per unit volume i.e., M = \(\frac{m_{\text {net }}}{V}\)

Question 4.
What is the magnetic moment associated with a solenoid?
Answer:
Magnetic dipole moment in a solinoid m = NIA
Where ‘N’ is the number of turns in the loop, ‘I’ the current and A the area vector.

Question 5.
What are the units of magnetic moment, magnetic induction and magnetic filed ?
Answer:
Unit of

  1. magnetic moment m is Am2 or J T-1.
  2. Magnetic induction – wb m-2 or Tesla (T)
  3. magnetic field – Tesla.

Question 6.
Magnetic lines form continuous closed loops. Why ? (A.P. Mar. 16)
Answer:
Magnetic lines of force always start from north pole and forming curved path, enter south pole and travel to north pole inside the magnet. Thus lines of force are forming closed loops.

Question 7.
Define magnetic declination. (Mar. ’14)
Answer:
Magnetic Declinatin (D) : The angle between the true geographic north and the north shown by a compass needle is called magnetic declination or simply declination (D).
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 36

Question 8.
Define magnetic inclination or angle of dip. (A.P. & T.S. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Inclination or Dip (I) : The angle which the total intensity of earth’s magnetic field makes with the horizontal at any place is called inclination (I).

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 9.
Classify the following materials with regard to magnetism : Manganese, Cobalt, Nickel, Bismuth, Oxygen, Copper. (A.P. Mar. ’19 & T.S. Mar. ’16, ’15)
Answer:
Ferromagnetic materials → Cobalt, Nickel.
Paramagnetic materials → Oxygen, Manganese
Diamagnetic materials → Bismuth, Copper

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Derive an expression for the axial field of a solenoid of radius “a”, containing “n” turns per unit length and carrying current “i”.
Answer:
Expression for the axial field of a solenoid :

  1. Consider a solinoid of length ‘2l’ and radius ‘a’ having ‘n’ turns per unit length.
  2. Let ‘I’ be the current in the solenoid.
  3. We have to calculate magnetic field at any point P on the axis of solenoid, where OP = r.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 1
  4. Consider a small element of thickness dx of the solenoid, at a distance ‘x’ from ‘O’.
  5. Number of turns in the element = ndx.
  6. Magnitude of magnetic field at P due to this current element is dB = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{ndx} \cdot \mathrm{Ia}^2}{2\left[(\mathrm{r}-\mathrm{x})^2+\mathrm{a}^2\right]^{3 / 2}}\)
  7. If P lies at a very large distance from 0, i.e., r > > a and r > > x, then [(r – x)2 + a2]3/2 = r3.
    ⇒ dB = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{ndx} \mid \mathrm{a}^2}{2 \mathrm{r}^3}\)
  8. To get total magnetic field, integrating the above equation between the limits from X = -l to X = +l.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 2
  9. The magnitude of the magnetic moment of the solenoid is, m = n(2l) I (πa2).
    B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \mathrm{~m}}{\mathrm{r}^3}\)
  10. Therefore, magnetic moment of a bar magnet is equal to magnetic moment of an equivalent solenoid that produces the same magnetic field.

Question 2.
The force between two magnet poles separated by a distance’d’ in air is ‘F. At what distance between them does the force become doubled ?
Answer:
Force between two magnetic poles, F1 = F;
Distance between two magnetic poles, d1 = d
Force between two magnetic poles increased by double F2 = 2F
Distance between two magnetic poles, d2 = ?
From Coulombs law, \(\mathrm{F}_1 \mathrm{~d}_1^2\) = \(\mathrm{F}_2 \mathrm{~d}_2^2\)
Fd2 = 2 F \(\mathrm{d}_2^2\)
⇒ \(\mathrm{d}_2^2\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}^2}{2}\)
∴ d2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Question 3.
Compare the properties of para, dia and ferromagnetic substances.
Answer:
Diamagnetic substances

a) When these materials placed in a magnetic field, they are magnetised feebly in the opposite direction to the applied external field.
b) When a rod of diamagnetic material is suspended freely in a uniform magnetic field, it comes to rest in the perpendicular direction to the magnetic field.
c) When they kept in a non uniform magnetic field, they moves from the region of greater field strength to the region of less field strength.
d) The relative permeability is less than 1. μr < 1 and negative.
e) The susceptibility \((\chi)\) is low and negative.
E.g. : Copper, Silver, Water, Gold, Antimony, Bismuth, Mercury Quartz Diamond etc.

Paramagnetic Substance

a) When these materials placed in a magnetic field, they are magnetised feebly in the direction of the applied magnetic field.
b) When a rod of paramagnetic material is suspended freely in a uniform magneticfield, it comes to rest in the direction of the applied magnetic field.
c) When they kept in a non-uniform magnetic field, they moves from the region of less field strength to the region of greater field strength.
d) The relative permeability is greater than 1. μr > 1 and positive.
e) The susceptibility \((\chi)\) is small and positive.
E.g. : Aluminium, Magnetiam, Tungsten, Platinum, Manganese, liquid oxygen, Ferric chloride, Cupric chloride etc.

Fêrromagnetic substances

a) When these materials placed in a magnetic field, they are magnetised strongly in the direction of the applied external field.
b) When a rod of ferromagnetic material is suspended freely in a uniform magnetic field, it comes to rest in the direction of the applied magnetic field.
c) When they kept in a non-uniform magnetic field they moves from the regions of lesser (magnetic field) strength to the regions of stronger (magnetic field) strength.
d) The relative permeability is much greater than μr >> 1 and positive.
e) The stisceptibility \((\chi)\) is high and positive.
E.g. : Iron, Cobalt, Nickel, Gadolinium and their alloys.

Question 4.
Explain the elements of the Earth’s magnetic field and draw a sketch showing the relationship between the vertical component, horizontal component and angle of dip.
Answer:
The magnetic field of the earth at a point on its surface can be specified by the declination D, the angle of dip or the inclination I and the horizontal component of the earth’s field HE. These are known as the elements of the earth’s magnetic field.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 3

Explanation:

  1. The total magnetic field at P can be resolved into a horizontal component HE and a vertical component ZE.
  2. The angle that BE makes with HE is the angle of dip, I.
  3. Representing the vertical component by ZE, we have
    ZE = BE Sin I
    HE = BE Cos I
    Which gives Tan I = \(\frac{\mathrm{Z}_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{H}_{\mathrm{E}}}\)

Question 5.
Define retentivity and coercivity. Draw the hysteresis curve for soft iron and steel. What do you infer from these curves ?
Answer:

  1. Retentivity : The value of magnetic induction \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) left in the specimen, when the magnetising force (H) is reduced to zero is called Retentivity or Remanence or Residual magnetism.
  2. Coercivity : To reduce the retentivity to zero, we have to apply a magnetising force in opposite direction. This value of magnetising force is called coercivity or coercive force.
  3. Hysterisis eurve: The curve represents the relation between magnetic induction \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) (or) intensity of magnetization (I) of a ferromagnetic material with magnetizing force (or) magnetic intensity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{H}}\)) is called Hystersis curve.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 4
  4. Hysterisis curve for soft Iron and steel is shown below.
    The hysterisis loops of soft iron and steel reveal that

    1. The retentivity of soft iron is greater than the retentivity of steel.
    2. Soft Iron is more strongly magnetised than steel.
    3. Coercivity of Soft Iron is less than coercivity of steel. It means soft Iron loses its magnetisation more rapidly than steel does.
    4. As area of I – H loop for soft Iron is smaller than the area of I – H loop for steel. Therefore hysterisis loss in case of soft Iron is smaller than the hysterisis loss in case of steel.

Question 6.
If B is the magnetic field produced at the centre of a circular coil of one turn of length L carrying current I then what is the magnetic field at the centre of the same coil which is made into 10 turns ?
Answer:
For first circular coil; B1 = B, n1 = 1; I1 = I; a1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2 \pi}\)
For second circular coil, B2 = ? n2 = 10; I2 = I; a2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2 \pi}\)
As B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{n} I \mathrm{a}^2}{2 \mathrm{r}}\), B ∝ n
\(\frac{\mathrm{B}_2}{\mathrm{~B}_1}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{n}_1}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{B}_2}{\mathrm{~B}}\) = \(\frac{10}{1}\)
∴ B2 = 10 B

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 7.
If the number of turns of a solenoid is doubled, keeping the other factors constant, how does the magnetic field at the axis of the solenoid change?
Answer:
B1 = B (say); n1 = n; n2 = 2n; B2 =?
Magnetic field at the centre of a solinoid is given by B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{nI} \mathrm{a}^2(2 l)}{2 \mathrm{r}^3}\)
⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{B}_2}{\mathrm{~B}_1}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{n}_1}\) ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{B}_2}{\mathrm{~B}}\) = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{n}}\)
∴ B2 = 2 B

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Derive an expression for the magnetic field at a point on the axis of a current carrying circular loop.
Answer:
Expression for the magnetic field at a point on the axis of a current carrying circular loop:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 5

  1. Consider ‘O’ is the centre of a circular coil of one turn and radius ‘a’.
  2. Let P is a point at a distance r from the centre, along the axis of coil.
  3. The plane of the coil is ⊥r to the plane of paper.
  4. Consider two elements AB and AB’ each of length dl which are diametrically opposite.
  5. Then, the magnetic fields at P due to these two elements will be dB and dB in the direction PM and PN respectively.
  6. These directions are ⊥r to the lines joining the mid-points of the elements with the point P
  7. Resolve these fields into two components parallel (dB sin θ) and perpendicular (dB cos θ) to the axis of the coil.
  8. The dB cos θ components cancel one another and dB sin θ components are in the same direction and add up due to the symmetric elements of the circular coil.
  9. Therefore, the total magnetic field along the axis = B = \(\int \mathrm{dB}\) sin θ of the circular coil along PC —– (1)
  10. The magnetic field at ‘P’ due to current element of length ‘dl’ is
    ‘dB’ = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{I d l \sin \phi}{\left(a^2+x^2\right)}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{Id} l}{\left(\mathrm{a}^2+\mathrm{r}^2\right)}\) —– (II) [∵ φ = 90°]
  11. From equation (I) and (II), B = \(\int \frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{Id} l}{\left(\mathrm{a}^2+\mathrm{r}^2\right)} \sin \theta\)
    From Δle OPE, sin θ = \(\frac{a}{\sqrt{\left(a^2+r^2\right)}}\)
    ⇒ B = \(\int \frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{Id} l \mathrm{a}}{\left(\mathrm{a}^2+\mathrm{r}^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ia}}{4 \pi\left(\mathrm{a}^2+\mathrm{r}^2\right)^{3 / 2}} \int \mathrm{d} l\)
    But \(\int \mathrm{d} l\) = Circumference of the coil = 2πa
    ∴ B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \text { I a }}{4 \pi\left(a^2+r^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\) × 2πa = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ia}^2}{2\left(\mathrm{a}^2+\mathrm{r}^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\), Tesla along the direction of PC.
  12. If the coil contains N turns, then B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \text { NIa }^2}{2\left(a^2+r^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
  13. At the centre of the coil r = 0, B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI} \mathrm{a}^2}{2 \mathrm{a}^3}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI}}{2 \mathrm{a}}\)
    Note: If r >> a, B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI}\left(\pi \mathrm{a}^2\right)}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}^3}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI}_{\mathrm{A}}}{2 \pi^3}\)
    A = πa2 = Area of current loop.

Question 2.
Prove that a bar magnet and a solenoid produce similar fields.
Answer:
Bar magnet produce similar field of Solenoid:

  1. We know that the current loop acts as a magnetic dipole. According to Ampere’s all magnetic phenomena can be explained interms of circulating currents.
  2. Cutting a bar magnet is like a solenoid. We get two similar solenoids with weaker magnetic properties.
  3. The magnetic field lines remain continuous, emerging from one face of solenoid and entering into other face of solenoid.
  4. If we were to move a small compass needle in the neighbourhood of a bar magnet and a current carrying solenoid, we would find that the deflections of the needle are similar in both cases as shown in diagrams.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 6
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 7
    The axial field of a finite solenoid in order to demonstrate its similarity to that of a bar magnet –
  5. The magnetic field at point P due to bar magnet in the form of solenoid is B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{2 m}{r^3}\)
  6. The total magnetic field, at a point P due to solenoid is given by
  7. The magnitude of the magnetic moment of the solenoid is, m = n(2l) I (πa2).
    ∴ B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \mathrm{~m}}{\mathrm{r}^3}\)
  8. Therefore, magnetic moment of a bar magnet is equal to magnetic moment of an equivalent solenoid that produces the same magnetic field.

Question 3.
A small magnetic needle is set into oscillations in a magnetic field B obtain an expression for the time period of oscillation.
Answer:
Expression for time period of oscillation :

  1. A small compass needle (magnetic dipole) of known magnetic moment m and moment of Inertia AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 8 is placing in uniform magnetic field B and allowing it to oscillate in the magnetic field.
  2. This arrangement is shown in Figure.
  3. The torque on the needle is \(\tau\) = m × B
  4. In magnitude \(\tau\) = mB sin θ.
    Here \(\tau\) is restoring torque and θ is the angle between m and B.
  5. Therefore, in equilibrium
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 9
    Negative sign with mB sin θ implies that restoring torque is in opposition to deflecting torque.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 10
  6. For small values of θ in radians, we approximate sin θ ≈ θ and get
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 11
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 12
    This represents a simple harmonic motion.
  7. From defination of simple harmonic motion, we have \(\) = -ω2θ ——– (II)
    From equation (1) and (II), we get ⇒ ω2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{mB}}{\mathcal{J}}\)
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 13
  8. Therefore, the time period is
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 14

Question 4.
A bar magnet, held horizontally, is set into angular oscillations in the Earth’s magnetic field. It has time periods T1 and T2 at two places, where the angles of dip are θ1 and θ2 respectively. Deduce an expression for the ratio of the resultant magnetic fields at the two places.
Answer:

  1. Suppose, the resultant magnetic fields is to be compared at two places A and B.
  2. A bar magnet, held horizontally at A and which is set into angular oscillatins in the Earths magnetic field.
  3. Let time period of a bar magnet at place ‘A’ is T1 and angular displacement or angle of dip is θ1.
  4. As the bar magnet is free to rotate horizontally, it does not remain vertical component (B1sin θ1) It can have only horizontal component (B1 cos θ1)
  5. The time period of a bar magnet in uniform magnetic field is given by T = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{mB}_{\mathrm{H}}}}\)
  6. Now, in this case T = T1 and BH = B1cosθ1
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 15
  7. Therefore time period of a bar magnet at place ‘A’ is given by
    T1 = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{I}{m B_1 \cos \theta_1}}\) —– (1) Where I is moment of Inertia of a barmagnet and m is magnitude of magnetic moment.
  8. Similarly, the same bar magnet is placed at B and which is set into angular oscillations in the earths magnetic field.
  9. Let time period of a bar magnet at place B is T2 and angle of dip is θ2.
  10. Since horizontal component of earths field at B is BH = B2 cos θ2, time period,
    T2 = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{1}{\mathrm{mB}_2 \cos \theta_2}}\) —— (2)
  11. Dividing equation (1) by equation (2), we get \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_1}{\mathrm{~T}_2}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{mB}_2 \cos \theta_2}{\mathrm{mB}_1 \cos \theta_1}}\)
    Squaring on both sides, we have \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_1^2}{\mathrm{~T}_2^2}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{B}_2 \cos \theta_2}{\mathrm{~B}_1 \cos \theta_1}\)
  12. But B1 = μ0H1 and B2 = μ0H2
    \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_1^2}{\mathrm{~T}_2^2}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{H}_2 \cos \theta_2}{\mu_0 \mathrm{H}_1 \cos \theta_1}\)
  13. Therefore, \(\frac{\mathrm{H}_1}{\mathrm{H}_2}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_2^2 \cos \theta_2}{\mathrm{~T}_1^2 \cos \theta_1}\)
    H2 T?cosOi .
  14. By knowing T1, T2 and θ1, θ2 at different places A and B, we can find the ratio of resultant magnetic fields.

Question 5.
Define magnetic susceptibility of a material. Name two elements one having positive susceptibility and other having negative susceptibility. (A.P. Mar. ’15)
Answer:

  1. SusceptIbility: When a material is placed in a magnetic field, the ratio of the intensity of magnetization acquired by it to the intensity of the applied magnetic field is called its susceptibility.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 16
  2. The susceptibility of a material represents its ability to get magnetism.
  3. Susceptibility is a dimension less quantity.
  4. Relation between μr and \(\chi\):
    • Suppose that material is placed in a magnetic field of intensity H. Let I be the intensity of magnetisation acquired by it.
    • Then the magnetic induction with in the material is
      B = μ0H + μ0I ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{B}}{\mathrm{H}}\) = μ0[1 + \(\frac{\mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{H}}\)]
      ⇒ μ = μ0[1 + \(\chi\)] ⇒ \(\frac{\mu}{\mu_0}\) = 1 + \(\chi\)
      μr = 1 + \(\chi\) [∵ μr = \(\frac{\mu}{\mu_0}\)]
  5. Negative susceptibility (y) of diamagnetic elements4are Bismuth (-1.66 × 10-5) and copper (-9.8 × 10-6).
  6. Positive susceptibility of Ferromagnetic elements are Aluminium (2.3 × 10-5) and oxygen at STP (2.1 × 10-6).
  7. Large and positive susceptibility of Ferromagnetic elements are Cobalt and Nickel.

Question 6.
Obtain Gauss Law for magnetism and explain it. (T.S. Mar. ’19)
Answer:
Gauss law for Magnetism:

  1. According to Gauss’s law for magnetism, the net magnetic flux (ϕB) through any closed surface is always zero.
  2. The law implies that the no. of magnetic field lines leaving any closed surface is always equal to the number of magnetic field lines entering it.
  3. Suppose a closed surface S is held in a uniform magnetic field B. Consider a small vector area element ΔS of this surface as shown in figure.
  4. Magnetic flux through this area element is defined as
    ΔϕB = B. ΔS. Then the net flux ϕB, is,
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 17
  5. If the area elements are really small, we can rewrite this equation as
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 18
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 19
  6. Comparing this equation with Gauss’s law of electrostatics i.e., electric flux through a closed surface S is given by
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 20
    Where q is the electric charge enclosed by the surface.
  7. In an electric dipole were enclosed by the surface equal and opposite charges in the dipole add upto zero. Therefore, ϕE would be zero.
  8. The fact that ϕB = 0 indicates that the simplest magnetic element is a dipole or current loop.
  9. The isolated magnetic poles, called magnetic monopoles are not known to exist.
  10. All magnetic phenomena can be explained interms of an arrangement of magnetic dipoles and /or current loops.
  11. Thus corresponding to equation (II) of Gauss’s theorem in electrostatics, we can visualize equation (I) as
    ϕB = \(\int_{S_{,}} B . d S\) = µ0 (m) + µ0 (-m) = 0 where m is strength of N-pole and -m is strength of S -pole of same magnet.
  12. The net magnetic flux through any closed surface is zero.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 7.
What do you understand by “hysteresis” ? How does this propetry influence the choice of materials used in different appliances where electromagnets are used ?
Answer:

  1. Cycle of magnetisation : When a fen or magnetic specimen is slowly magnetised, the intensity of magnetisation varies with magnetic field through a cycle is called cycle of magnetisation.
  2. Hysterisis : The lagging of intensity of magnetisation (I) and magnetic induction (B) behind magnetic field intensity (H) when a magnetic specimen is subjected to a cycle of magnetisation is called hysterisis.
  3. Retentivity : The value of I for which H = 0 is called retentivity or residual magnetism.
  4. Coercivity: The value of magnetising force required to reduce I is zero in reverse direction of H is called coercive force or coercivity.
  5. Hysterisis curve : The curve represents the relation between B or I of a ferromagnetic material with magnetising force or magnetic intensity H is known as Hysterisis curve.
  6. Explanation of hysterisis loop or curve :
    • In fig, a closed curve ABCDEFA in H – I plane, called hysterisis loop is shown in fig.
    • When ferromagnetic specimen is slowly magnetised, I increases with H.
    • Part OA of the curve shows that I increases with H.
      AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 21
    • At point A, the value I becomes constant is called saturation value.
    • At B, I has some value while H is zero.
    • In fig. BO represents retentivity and OC represents coercivity.
  7. Uses : The properties of hysterisis curve, i.e., saturation, retentivity, coercivity and hysterisis loss help us to choose the material for specific purpose.
    1. Permanent magnets : A permanent magnet should have both large retentivity and large coercivity. Permanent magnets are used in galvanometers, voltmeres, ammeters, etc.
    2. An electromagnet core : The electromagnet core material should have maximum induction field B even with small fields H, low hysterisis loss and high initial permeability.
    3. Transformer cores, Dynamocore, Chokes, Telephone diaphragms: The core material should have high initial permeability, low hysterisis loss and high specific resistance to reduce eddy currents. Soft iron is the best suited material.

Problems

Question 1.
What is torque acting on a plane coil of “n” turns carrying a current “i” and having an area A, when placed in a constant magnetic field B ?
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 22
For Rectangular LOOP PQRS :
Length PR = QS = l
breadth PQ = RS = b
Current = i
Magnetic field Induction = B
Angle made by normal to plane of coil with B = θ
Forces on conductor PR and SQ, F = Bil sin θ
Force on conductor PQ and RS, F = 0
Torque on a rectangular coil, T – F × ⊥r distnace (b) ⇒ \(\tau\) – Bil sin θ (b)
∴ \(\tau\) = BiA sinθ[∵ A = l × b]
If the loop has n turns, then \(\tau\) = B in A sin θ.

Question 2.
A coil of 20 turns has an area of 800 mm2 and carries a current of 0.5A. If it is placed in a magnetic field of intensity 0.3T with its plane parallel to the field, what is the torque that it experiences ?
Answer:
n = 20; A = 800 mm2 = 800 × 10-6 m2; i = 0.5A; B = 0.3T; θ = 0°.
When the plane parallel to the field,
T = B in A cos θ = 0.3 × 0.5 × 20 × 800 × 10-6 × cos 0°
\(\tau\) = 2.4 × 10-3 Nm

Question 3.
In the Bohr atom model the electrons move around the nucleus in circular orbits. Obtain an expression the magnetic moment (μ) of the electron in a Hydrogen atom in terms of its angular momentum L.
Answer:
Consider an electron of charge e, moves with constant speed v in a circular orbit of radius ‘r’ in Hydrogen atom as shown in fig.
Time period of orbiting electron,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 23
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 24
The current constitute by revolving electron in circular motion around a nucleus, I = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{T}}\).
orbital magnetic moment, μ = IA = I (πr2)
⇒ μ = \(\frac{\mathrm{ev}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\left(\pi \mathrm{r}^2\right)=\frac{\mathrm{evr}}{2}\)
μ = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}(\mathrm{mvr})\) [∵ Multiplying and dividing with ‘m’ on right side]
∴ μ = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{2 \mathrm{~m}} \mathrm{~L}\) where L = mvr = angular momentum.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 4.
A solenoid of length 22.5 cm has a total of 900 turns and carries a current of 0.8 A. What is the magnetising field H near the centre and far away from the ends of the solenoid ?
Answer:
l = 22.5 cm = 22.5 × 10-2 m = \(\frac{45}{2}\) × 10-2m
N = 900; I = 0.8A ; H = ?
H = \(\frac{\mathrm{NI}}{l}\) = \(\frac{900 \times 0.8}{\left(\frac{45}{2}\right) \times 10^{-2}}\)
H = \(\frac{900}{45}\) × 0.8 × 102 × 2
∴ H = 3200Am-1

Question 5.
A bar magnet of length 0.1 m and with a magnetic moment of 5Am2 is placed in a uniform amagnetic field n of intensity 0.4T, with its axis making an angle of 60° with the field. What is the torque on the magnet ? (Mar. ’14)
Answer:
Given, 2l = 0.1m; m = 5A – m2; B = OAT; θ = 60°.
Torque, T = mB sin θ = 5 × 0.4 × sin 60° = 2 × \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
∴ T = 1.732 N-m

Question 6.
If the Earth’s magnetic field at the equator is about 4 × 105T, What is its approximate magnetic dipole moment ?
Answer:
Given, BE = 4 × 10-5 T; r = 6.4 × 106m; m = ?
BE = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^3}\)
4 × 10-5 = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7}}{4 \pi}\) × \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\left(6.4 \times 10^6\right)^3}\)
m = 4 × 102 × (6.4 × 106)3
∴ m = 1.05 × 1023 Am2 ≈ 1 × 1023 Am2

Question 7.
The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field at a certain place is 2.6 × 10-5T and the angle of dip is 60°. What is the magnetic field of the earth at this location ?
Answer:
Given HE = 2.6 × 10-5T;
D (or) δ = 60°
BE = \(\frac{\mathrm{H}_{\mathrm{E}}}{\cos \mathrm{D}}\) = \(\frac{2.6 \times 10^{-5}}{\cos 60^{\circ}}\) = \(\frac{2.6 \times 10^{-5}}{(1 / 2)}\) = 5.2 × 10-5T
∴ BE = 5.2 × 10-5T

Question 8.
A solenoid, of insulated wire, is wound on a core with relative permeability 400. If the number of turns per metre is 1000 and the solenoid carries a current of 2A, calculate H, B and the magnetisation M.
Answer:
Given, µr = 400, I = 2A, n = 1000
H = nI = 1000 × 2 = 2 × 103 A/m
B = µrµ0 H = 400 × 4π × 10-7 × 2 × 103 = 1.0 T Magnetisation M = (µr – 1) H = (400 – 1)H = 399 × 2 × 103
∴ M \(\simeq\) 8 × 105 A/m

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
Answer the following questions regarding earth’s magnetism :
a) A vector needs three quantities for its specification. Name the three independent quantities conventionally used to specify the earth’s magnetic field.
Answer:
The three independent quantities used to specify earth’s magnetic field are, Magnetic declination (θ), Magnetic dip (δ) and Horizontal component of earth’s field (H).

b) The angle of dip at a location in southern India is about 18°. Would you expect a greater or smaller dip angle in Britain ?
Answer:
Yes, we expect greater dip angle in Britian, because it is located close to North pole; δ = 70° in Britain.

c) If you made a map of magnetic field lines at Melbourne in Australia, would the lines seem to go into the ground or come out of the ground ?
Answer:
As Melbourne is situated in Southern hemisphere where north pole of earth’s magnetic field lies, therefore, magnetic lines of foece seem to come out of the ground.

d) In which direction would a compass free to move in the vertical plane point to, if located right on the geomagnetic north ro south pole ?
Answer:
At the poles, earth’s field is exactly vertical. As the compass needle is free to rotate in a horizontal plane only, it may point out in any direction.

e) The earth’s field, it is claimed, roughly approximates the field due to a dipole of magnetic moment 8 × 1022 J T-1 located at its centre. Check the order of magnitude of this number in some way.
Answer:
Here, M = 8 × 1022 J T-1.
Let us calculate magnetic field intensity at magnetic line of short mangetic dipole for which, d = R = radius of earth 6,400 km = 6.4 × 106 m.
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{d}^3}\) = 10-7 × \(\frac{8 \times 10^{22}}{\left(6.4 \times 10^6\right)^3}\) = 0.31 × 10-4T.
= 0.31 gauss
This value is in good approximation with observed values of earth’s magnetic field.

f) Geologists claim that besides the main magnetic N-S poles, there are several local poles on the earth’s surface oriented in different directions. How is such a thing possible at all ?
Answer:
The earth’s magnetic field is only approximately a dipole field. Therefore, local N-S poles may exist oriented in different directions. This is possible due to deposits of magnetised minerals.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 2.
Answer the following questions :
a) The earth’s magnetic field varies from point to point in space. Does it also change with time ? If so, on what time scale does it change appreciably ?
Answer:
Yes, earth’s field undergoes a change with time. For example, daily changes, annual changes secular changes with period of the order of 960 years and irregular changes like magnetic storms. Time scale for appreciable change is roughly a few hundred years.

b) The earth’s core is known to contain iron. Yet geologists do not regard this as a source of the earth’s magnetism. Why ?
Answer:
The earth’s core does contain iron but in the molten form only. This is not ferromagnetic and hence it cannot be treated as a source of earth’s magnetism.

c) The charged currents in the outer conducting regions of the earth’s core are thought to be responsible for earth’s magnetism. What might be the ‘battery’ (i.e., the source of energy) to sustain these currents ?
Answer:
One of the possibilities is radioactivity in the interior of the earth. But it is not certain.

d) The earth may have even reversed the direction of its field several times during its history of 4 to 5 billion years. How can geologists know about the earth’s field in such distant past ?
Answer:
Earth’s magnetic field gets recorded weakly in certain rocks during their solidification. An analysis of these rocks may reveal the history of earth’s magnetism.

e) The earth’s field departs from its dipole shape substantially at large, distances (greater than about 30,000 km). What agencies may be responsible for this distortion?
Answer:
The earth’s magnetic field gets modified by the field produced by motion of ions in earth’s ionosphere.

f) Interstellar space has an extremely weak magnetic field of the order of 10-12 T. Can such a weak field be of any significant consequence? Explain.
[Note : Exercise 2 is meant mainly to arouse your curiosity. Answers to some questions above are tentative or unknown. Brief answers wherever possible are given at the end. For details, you should consult a good text on geomagnetism.)
Answer:
When a charged particle moves in a magnetic field, it is deflected along a circular path such that BeV = \(\frac{\mathrm{mV}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\) ∴ r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mV}}{\mathrm{Be}}\)
When B is low, r is high i.e., radius of curvature of path is very large. Therefore, over the gigantic inter stellar distance, the deflection of charged particles becomes less noticeable.

Question 3.
A short bar magnet placed with its axis at 30° with a uniform external magnetic field of 0.25 T experiences a troque of magnitude equal to 4.5 × 10-2 J. What is the magnitude of magnetic moment of the magnet?
Answer:
Here θ = 30°, B = 0.25 T, r = 4.5 × 10-2 J, M =?
As r = mB sin θ ∴ m = \(\frac{r}{B \sin \theta}\) = \(\frac{4.5 \times 10^{-2}}{0.25 \sin 30^{\circ}}\) = 0.36JT-1

Question 4.
A short bar magnet of magnetic moment m = 0.32 JT-1 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.15T. If the bar is free to rotate in the plane of the field, which orientation would correspond to its (a) stable, and (b) unstable equilibrium ? What is the potential energy of the magnet in each case?
Answer:
Here m = 0.32JT-1, B = 0.15T

  1. In stable equilibrium, the bar magnet is aligned along the magnetic field, i.e., θ = 0°.
    Potentiâl Energy = -mB cos θ° = -032 × 0.15 × 0 = -4.8 × 10-2J.
  2. In unstable equilibrium the magnet is so oriented that magnetic moment is at 180° to the magnetic field i.e., θ = 180°.
    Potential Energy = -mB cos 180° = – 0.32 × 0.15 (-1) = 4.8 × 10-2 J.

Question 5.
A closely wound solenoid of 800 turns and area of cross section 2.5 × 10-4 m2 carries a
current of 3.0A. Explain the sense in which the solenoid acts like a bar magnet. What is its associated magnetic moment ?
Answer:
Here n = 800, a = 2.5 × 10-4 m2, I = 3.0 A
A magnetic field develop along the axis of the solenoid. Therefore the current carrying solenoid behaves like a bar magnet m = N IA = 800 × 3.0 × 2.5 × 10-4
= 0.6 JT-1 along the axis of solenoid.

Question 6.
If the solenoid in Exercise 5 is free to turn about the vertical direction and a uniform horizontal magnetic field of 0.25 T is applied, what is the magnitude of torque on the solenoid when its axis makes an angle of 30° with the direction of applied field ?
Answer:
Here M = 0.6 JT-1 (from Question 5)
B = 0.25 T r = ? q = 30°
As r = m B sin θ’ ∴ r = 0.6 × 0.25 sin 30° = 0.075 N.m.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 7.
A bar magnet of magnetic moment 1.5 JT-1 lies aligned with the direction of a uniform magnetic field of 0.22T.
a) What is the amount of work required by an external torque to turn the magnet so as to align its magnetic moment:
(i) normal to the field direction,
(ii) opposite to the field direction ?
Answer:
Here m = 1.5 JT-1, B = 0.22 T, W = ?

a) Here θ1 = 0° (along the field)
θ2 = 90° (⊥ to the field)
As W = -mB (cos θ2 – cos θ1)
W =-1.5 × 0.22 (cos 90° – cos 0°) = -0.33 (0 – 1)
= 0.33 f

ii) Here θ1 = 0°, θ2 = 180°
W = -1.5 × 0.22 (cos 180° – cos 0°)
= – 0.33 (-1 – 1) = 0.66 J.

b) What is the torque on the magnet in cases (i) and (ii) ?
Answer:
Torque r = mB sin θ
i) Here θ = 90°, r = 1.5 × 0.22 sin 90° = 0.33 Nm
ii) Here θ = 180°, r = 1.5 × 0.22 sin 180° = 0

Question 8.
A closely wound solenoid of 2000 turns and area of cross-section 1.6 × 10-4 m2, carrying a current of 4.0 A, is suspended through its centre allowing it to turn in a horizontal plane.
a) What is the magnetic moment associated with the solenoid ?
Answer:
N = 2000, A = 1.6 × 10-4 m2, I = 4 amp, M = ?
As m = NIA
∴ M = 2000 × 4 × 1.6 × 10-4 = 1.28 JT-1

b) What is the force and torque on the solenoid if a uniform horizontal magnetic field of 7.5 × 10-2 T is set up at an angle of 30° with the axis of the solenoid ?
Answer:
Net force on the solenoid = 0
Torque, r = m B sin θ = 1.28 × 7.5 × 10-2 sin 30°
= 1.28 × 7.5 × 10-2 × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
r = 4.8 × 10-2 Nm.

Question 9.
A circular coil of 76 turns and radius 10 cm. carrying a current of 0.75 A rests with its plane normal to an external field of magnitude 8.0 × 10-2 T. The coil is free to turn about an axis in its plane perpendicular to the field direction. When the coil is turned slightly and released, it oscillates about its stable equilibrium with a frequency of 2.0 s-1. What is the moment of inertia of the coil about its axis of rotation.
Answer:
Here n = 16, r = 10 cm = 0.1 m, I = 0.75A, B = 5.0 × 10-2T
v = 2.0 s-1, I = ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 25

Question 10.
A magnetic needle free to rotate in a vertical plane parallel to the magnetic meridian has its north tip pointing down at 22° with the horizontal. The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field at the place is known to be 0.35 G. Determine the magnitude of the earth’s magnetic field at the place.
Answer:
Here θ = 22° 1 + 0.35 G, R = ?
As H = R cos θ
R = H/cos θ = \(\frac{0.35}{\cos 22^{\circ}}\) = \(\frac{0.35}{0.9272}\) = 0.38 G

Question 11.
At a certain location in Africa, a compass points 12° west of the geographic north. The north tip of the magnetic needle of a dip circle placed in the plane of magnetic meridian points 60° above the horizontal. The horizontal component of the earth’s field is measured to be 0.16 G. Specify the direction and magnitude of the earth’s field at the location.
Answer:
Here declination θ = 12° west, dip θ = 60°
H = 0.16 gauss = 0.16 × 10-4 tesla. R = ?
As H = R cos θ
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 26
R = \(\frac{\mathrm{H}}{\cos \theta}\) = \(\frac{0.16 \times 10^{-4}}{\cos 60^{\circ}}\)
R = \(\frac{0.16 \times 10^{-4}}{1 / 2}\) = 0.32 × 10-4T
The earth’s field lies in a vertical plane 12° west of geographic meridian at an angle of 60° above the horizontal.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 12.
A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment of 0.48 J T-1. Give the direction and magnitude of the magnetic field produced by the magnet at a distance of 10 cm from the centre of the magnet on (a) the axis, (b) the equitorial lines (normal bisector) of the magnet.
Answer:
Here M = 0.48 J T-1, B = ?
d = 10 cm = 0.1 m

a) On the axis of the magnet
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 M}{d^3}\) = 10-7 × \(\frac{2 \times 0.48}{(0.1)^3}\)
= 0.96 × 10T along S – N direction

b) On the equitorial line of the magnet
B = \(\frac{\mu_{\mathrm{0}}}{4 \pi} \times \frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{d}^3}\) = 10-7 × \(\frac{0.48}{(0.1)^3}\) = 0.48 × 10-4T, along N – S direction.

Question 13.
A short bar magnet placed in a horizontal plane has its axis aligned along the magnetic north-south direction. Null points are found on the axis of the magnet at 14 cm from the centre of the magnet. The earth’s magnetic field at the place is 0.36 G and the angle of dip is zero. What is the total magnetic field on the normal bisector of the magnet at the same distance as the null-point- (i.e., 14 cm) from the centre of the magnet ? (At null distants, field due to a magnet is equal and opposite to the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field.)
Answer:
As null points are on the axis of the magnet, therefore
B1 = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{d}^3}\) = H
On the equitorial line of magnet at same distance (d), field due to the magnet is
B2 = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{d}^3}\) = \(\frac{B_1}{2}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{H}}{2}\)

∴ Total Magnetic field at this point on equitorial line is
B = B2 + H = H + \(\frac{\mathrm{H}}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{H}\)
B = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 0.36 = 0.54G

Question 14.
If the bar magnet in Exercise 13 is turned around by 180°, where will the new null points be located ?
Answer:
When the bar magnet is turned through 180°, neutral points would lie on equitorial line, so that
B2 = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{M}{d_2^3}\) = H
On the equitorial line of magnet at same direction (d), field due to the magnet is
B2 = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{d}_2^3}\) = H
In the previous question
B1 = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{d}_1^3}\)
\(\mathrm{d}_2^3\) = \(\frac{d_1^3}{2}\) = \(\frac{(14)^3}{2}\)
d2 = \(\frac{14}{2^{1 / 3}}\) = 11.1 cm

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 15.
A short bar magnet of magnetic movement 5.25 × 10-2 J T-1 is placed with its axis perpendicular to the earth’s field direction. At what distance from the centre of the magnet, the resultant field is inclined at 45° with earth’s field on (a) its normal bisector and (b) its axis. Magnitude of the earth’s field at the place is given to be 0.42 G. Ignore the length of the magnet in comparison to the distances involved.
Answer:
Here M = 5.25 × 10-2 J T-1 r = ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 27
Earth’s field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_{\mathrm{e}}\) = 0.42 G = 0.42 × 10-4 T
a) At a point P distant r on normal bisector, fig, field due to the magnet is
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_2\) = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{M}{r^3}\) along PAI/NS.
The resultant field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) will be inclined at 45° to the earth’s field along PQ only when
|\(\vec{B}_2\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_{\mathrm{e}}\)|
\(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{M}{r^3}\) = 0.42 × 10-4
which gives, r = 0.05 m = 5 cm

b) When the point P lies on axis of the magnet such that OP = r, field due to magnet [fig.] is
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 28
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_1\) = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{r}^3}\) along PO, Earth’s field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_{\mathrm{e}}\) is along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{PA}}\). The resultant field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) will be inclined at 45° to Earth’s field [Figure.] only when
|\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_1\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{e}}}\)|
\(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{r}^3}\) = 0.42 × 10-4 which gives
r = 6.3 × 10-2 m = 6.3 cm

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
Answer the following Questions :
a) Why does a paramagnetic sample display greater magnetisation (for the same magnetising field) when cooled ?
Answer:
This is because at lower temperatures, the tendency to disrupt the alignment of dipoles (due to magnetising field) decreases on account of reduced random thermal motion.

b) Why is diamagnetism, in contrast, almost independent of temperature ?
Answer:
In a diamagnetic sample, each molecule is not a magnetic dipole in itself. Therefore, random thermal motion of molecules does not affect the magnetism of the specimen. This is why diamagnetism is independent of temperature.

c) If a toroid uses bismuth for its core,’ will the field in the core be (slightly) greater or (slightly) less than when the core is empty ?
Answer:
As bismuth is diamagnetic, therefore, the field in the core will be slightly less than when the core is empty.

d) Is the permeability of a ferromagnetic material independent of the magnetic field ? If not, is it more for lower or higher fields ?
Answer:
No, permeability of a ferromagnetic material is not independent of magnetic field. As is clear from the hysteresis curve, μ is greater for lower fields.

e) Magnetic field lines are always nearly normal to the surface of a ferromagnet at every point. (This fact is analogous to the static electric field lines being normal to the surface of a conductor at every point.) Why ?
Answer:
Magnetic field lines are always nearly normal to the surface of a ferromagnet at every point. The proof of this important fact is based on the boundary conditions of magnetic fields (B and H) at the interface of two media.

f) Would the maximum possible magnetisation of a paramagnetic sample be of the same order of magnitude as the magnetisation of a ferromagnet ?
Answer:
The magnetic permeability of a ferromagnetic material μ > > 1. That is why the field lines meet this medium normally.

Question 2.
Answer the following questions :
a) Explain qualitatively on the basis of domain picture the irreversibility in the magnetisation curve of a ferromagnet.
Answer:
Since, in a ferromagnetic substance the magnetic properties are due to alignment of domains, therefore on with drawing the magnetising field the original domain formation does not take place.

b) The hysteresis loop of a soft iron piece has a much smaller area than that of a carbon steel piece. If the material is to go through repeated cycles of magnetisation, which piece will dissipate greater heat energy ?
Answer:
Carbon steel piece, because heat lost per cycle is proportional to the area of the hysteresis loop.

c) A system displaying a hysterisis loop such as a ferromagnet, is a device for storing memory ?’ Explain the meaning of this statement.
Answer:
Magnetisation of a ferromagnet is not a single – valued function of the magnetizing field. Its value for a particular field depends both on the field and also on the history of magnetisatiop. In other words, the value of magnetisation is a record or ‘memory’ of its cycle of magnetisation. If information bits can be made to correspond these cycles, the system displaying such a hysterisis loop can act as a device for storing information.

d) What kind of ferromagnetic material is used for coating magnetic tapes in a cassette player, or for building ‘memory stores’ in a modern computer ?
Answer:
Ceramics (specially treated barium iron oxides) also called ferrites.

e) A certain region of space is to be shielded from magnetic fields. Suggest a method.
Answer:
Surround the region by soft iron rings. Magnetic field lines will be drawn into the rings, and the enclosed space will be free of magnetic field. But this shielding is only approximate, unlike the perfect electric shielding of a cavity in a conductor placed in an external electric field.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 3.
A long straight horizontal cable carries a current of 2.5 A in the direction 10° south of west to 10° north of east. The magnetic meridian of the place happens to be 10° west of the geographic meridian. The earth’s magnetic field at the location is 0.33 G, and the angle of dip is zero. Locate the line of neutral points (ignore the thickness of the cable) ? (At neutral points, magnetic field due to a current – carrying cable is equal and opposite to the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field).
Answer:
Here i = 2.5 amp
R = 0.33G = 0.33 × 10-4 T; θ = 0°
Horizontal component of earth’s field
H = R cos θ = 0.39 × 10-4 cos 35°
= 0.39 × 10-4 × 0.8192
= 3.9 × 10-5 tesla.
Vertical component of earth’s field.
H = R cos θ = 0.33 × 10-4 cos 0°
= 0.33 × 10-4 tesla.
Let the neutral points lie at a distance r from the cable
Strength of magnetic field on this line due to current in the cable = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 29
At neutral point,
\(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) = H
r = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{H}}\) = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 2.5}{2 \pi \times 0.33 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 1.5 × 10-2m
Hence neutral points lie on a straigt line parallel to the cable at a perpendicular distance of 1.5 cm above te plane of the paper.

Question 4.
A telephone cable at a place has four long straight horizontal wires carrying a current of 1.0 A in the same direction east to west. The earth’s magnetic field at the place is 0.39 G, and the angle of dip is 35°. The magnetic declination is nearly zero. What are the resultant magnetic fields at points 4.0 cm below the cable ?
Answer:
There, no. of wires, n = 4, i = 1.0 amp
Earth’s field R = 0.39 G = 0.39 × 10-4 T
dip, θ = 35 declination θ = 0°
R1 = ?, R2 = ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 30
r = 4 cm each 4 × 10-2 m
Magnetic field at 4 cm due to currents in 4 wires
B = 4 × \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) = 4 × \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1}{2 \pi \times 4 \times 10^{-2}}\)
Horizontal component of earth’s field
H = R cos θ = 0.39 × 10-4 cos 35°
= 0.39 × 10-4 × 0.8192 = 3.19 × 10-5tesla
Vertical component of Earth’s field
V = R sin θ = 0.39 × 10-4 sin 35°
= 0.39 × 10-4 × 0.5736 = 2.2 × 10-5 tesla.
At point Q, 4 cm below the wire, horizontal component due to Earth’s field and field due to current are in opposite directions (fig.)
H1 = H – B
∴ H1 = 3.19 × 10-5 – 2 × 10-5
= 1.19 × 10-5 tesla.
Hence R1 = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{H}_1^2+\mathrm{V}^2}\)
= \(\sqrt{\left(1.19 \times 10^{-5}\right)^2+\left(2.2 \times 10^{-5}\right)^2}\)
= 2.5 × 10-5 tesla.
At point P, 4 cm above the wire, horizontal component of Earth’s field and field due to current are in the same direction [fig.]
H2 = H + B = 3.19 × 10-5 + 2 × 10-5 = 5.19 × 10-5 T
R2 = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{H}_2^2+\mathrm{V}^2}\) = \(\sqrt{\left(5.19 \times 10^{-5}\right)^2+\left(2.2+10^{-5}\right)^2}\) = 5.54 × 10-5 tesla.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 5.
A compass needle free to turn in a horizontal plane is placed at the centre of circular coil of 30 turns and radius 12 cm. The coil is in a vertical plane making an angle of 45° with the magnetic meridian. When the current in the coil is 0.35 A, the needle points west to east.
a) Determine the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field at the location.
b) The current in the coil is reversed, and the coil is rotated about its vertical axis by an angle of 90° in the anticlockwise sense looking from above. Predict the direction of the needle. Take the magnetic declination at the places to be zero.
Answer:
a) Here n = 30, r = 12 cm = 12 × 10-2 m
i = 0.35 amp, H = ?
As is clear from fig. 11 the needle can point west to east only when H = B sin 45°
Where B = Magnetic field strength due to current in coil = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \pi \mathrm{ni}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 31
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 32

b) When current in coil is reversed and coil is turned through 90° anticlock wise, the direction of needle will reverse (i.e., it will point from East to West). This follow from the figure.

Question 6.
A magnetic dipole is under the influence of two magnetic fields. The angle between the field directions is 60°, and one of the fields has a magnitude of 1.2 × 10-2 T. If the dipole comes to stable equilibrium at an angle of 15° with this field, what is the magnitude of the other field ?
Answer:
Here θ = 60°; B1 = 1.2 × 10-2 tesla
θ1 = 15°; θ2 = 60° – 15° = 45°
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 33
In equilibrium, torque due to two fields must balance i.e., r1 = r2
MB1 sin θ1 = MB2 sin θ2
B2 = \(\frac{B_1 \sin \theta_1}{\sin \theta_2}\) = \(\frac{1.2 \times 10^{-2} \sin 15^{\circ}}{\sin 45^{\circ}}\)
B2 = \(\frac{1.2 \times 10^{-2} \times 0.2588}{0.7071}\) = 4.4 × 10-3 tesla.

Question 7.
A monoenergetic (18 keV) electron beam initially in the horizontal direction is subjected to a horizontal magnetic field of 0.04 G normal to the initial direction. Estimate the up or down deflection of the beam over a distance of 30 cm (me = 9.11 × 10-31 kg).
[Note : Data in this exercise are so chosen that the answer will give you an idea of the effect of earth’s magnetic field bn the motion of the electron beam from the electron gun to the screen in a TV set] .
Answer:
Here energy E = 18 KeV = 18 × 1.6 × 10-19J
B = 0.40 G = 0.40 × 10-4 T
x = 30 cm = 0.3 m
As E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mυ2 ∴ υ = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 E}{m}}\)
In a magnetic field electron beam is deflected along a circular arc of radius r, such that
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 34
BeV = \(\frac{m v^2}{r}\) or r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}}{\mathrm{Be}}\)
r = \(\frac{m}{B e} \sqrt{\frac{2 E}{m}}\) = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{Be}} \sqrt{2 \mathrm{Em}}\) = 11.3 m
If y is the deflection at the end of the path it is clear from fig.
θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{x} / 2}\) = 2\(\frac{y}{x}\)
or y = \(\frac{x^2}{2 r}\) = \(\frac{0.30 \times(0.30)}{2 \times 11.3}\)m = 0.004m = 4mm

Question 8.
A sample of paramagnetic salt contains 2.0 × 1024 atomic dipoles each of dipole moment 1.5 × 10-23 J T-1. The sample is placed under a homogeneous magnetic field of 0.64 T, and cooled to a temperature of 4.2 K. The degree of magnetic saturation achieved is equal to 15%. What is the total dipole moment of the sample for a magnetic field of 0.98 T and a temperature of 2.8 K ? (Assume Curie’s law)
Answer:
Here no. of dipoles n = 2 × 1024
Magnetic moment of each dipole M = 1.5 × 10-23 J T-1.
Total dipole moment of sample = n × M = 2 × 1024 × 1.5 × 10-23 = 30
As saturation achieved is 15% therefore, effective dipole moment
M1 = \(\frac{15}{100}\) × 30 = 4.5 J T-1; B1 = 0.64T, T1 = 4.2 k,
M2 = ?; B2 = 0.98 T,T2 = 2.8 k
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter 35

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Magnetism and Matter

Question 9.
A Rowland ring of mean radius 15 cm has 3500 turns of wire wound on a ferromagnetic core of relative permeability 800. What is the magnetic field B in the core for a magnetising current of 1.2 A?
Answer:
Here r = 15 cm = 15 × 10-2 m, N = 3500, Mr = 800
I = 1.2A, B =?
Number of turns, length, n = \(\frac{N}{2 \pi r}\) = \(\frac{3500}{2 \pi \times 15 \times 10^{-2}}\)
B = μ0μrnI
= 4π × 10-7 × 800 × \(\frac{3500 \times 1.2}{2 \pi \times 15 \times 10^{-2}}\)
= 4.48T

Question 10.
The magnetic moment vectors μs and μl associated with the intrinsic spin angular momentum S and orbital angular momentum 1, respectively, of an electron are predicted
by quantum theory (and verified experimentally to a high accuracy) to be given by:
ms = -(e/m) S,
μl = -(e/2m)l
Which of these relations is in accordance with the result expected classically? Outline the derivation of the classical result.
Answer:
Out of the two relations given only one is in accordance with classical physics. This is
\(\vec{\mu}_1\) = \(-\left(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\right) \vec{l}\)
It follows from the definitions of μ1 and l.
μ = iA = \(\left(\frac{-\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{T}}\right) \pi \mathrm{r}^2\)
l = mvr = \(\mathrm{m}\left(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{T}}\right) \mathrm{r}\)
Where r is the radius of the circular orbit, which the electron of mass m and charge (-e) completes in time T.
Divide (i) by (ii) \(\frac{\mu_1}{l}\) = \(\frac{-\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{T}} \pi \mathrm{r}^2 \times \frac{\mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{m}^2 \pi \mathrm{r}^2}=\frac{-\mathrm{e}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\)
\(\vec{\mu}_1\) = \(\left(\frac{-\mathrm{e}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\right) \vec{l}\)
‘Clearly \(\vec{\mu}_1\) and \(\vec{l}\) will be antiparallel (both being normal to the plane of the orbit)
In contrast \(\frac{\mu_{\mathrm{S}}}{\mathrm{S}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}\). It is obtained on the basis of quantum mechanics.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 7th Lesson Moving Charges and Magnetism Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 7th Lesson Moving Charges and Magnetism

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the importance of Oersted’s experiment ?
Answer:
Importance of Oersted’s experiment is every current carrying conductor produces a magnetic field around it and which is perpendicular to current carrying conductor.

Question 2.
State Ampere’s law and Biot-Savart law. (T.S. Mar. ’19)
Answer:
Ampere’s law : The line integral of the intensity of magnetic induction around a closed path is equal to µ0 times the total current enclosed in it.
\(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}\) = \(\mu_0 \mathrm{i}\)

Biot – Savart’s laws : Biot – Savart’s states that the intensity of magnetic induction (dB) due to a small element is directly proportional to the .

  1. current (i)
  2. length of the element (dl)
  3. sine angle between radius vector (r) and dl and
  4. Inversely proportional to the square of the point from current element.
    ∴ dB ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{i} \mathrm{d} l \sin \theta}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
    dB = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{i} d l \sin \theta}{r^2}\)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 3.
Write the expression for the magnetic induction at any point on the axis of a circular current-carrying coil. Hence, obtain an expression for the magnetic induction at the centre of the circular coil.
Answer:

  1. Intensity of magnetic induction field on the axis of the circular coil B = \(\frac{\mu_0 n i r^2}{2\left(r^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
  2. At the centre of the coil B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{ni}}{2 \mathrm{r}}\)

Question 4.
A circular coil of radius V having N turns carries a current “i”. What is its magnetic moment ?
Answer:
Magnetic moment (M) = N i A
M = N i (πr2) (∵ A = πr2)
∴ M = n N i r2

Question 5.
What is the force on a conductor of length L carrying a current “i” placed in a magnetic field of induction B ? When does it become maximum ?
Answer:

  1. Force on a conductor (F) = B i L sin θ
  2. If θ = 90°, FMax = B i L
    i.e., the direction of current and magnetic field are perpendicular to each other, then force is maximum.

Question 6.
What is the force on a charged particle of charge “q” moving with a velocity “v” in a uniform magnetic field of induction B ? When does it become maximum ?
Answer:

  1. Force on a charged particle (F) = B q v sin θ.
  2. If θ = 90°, FMax = B q v.

Question 7.
Distinguish between ammeter and voltmeter. (A.P. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Ammeter

  1. It is used to measure current.
  2. Resistance of an ideal Ammeter is zero.
  3. It is connected in series in the circuits.

Voltmeter

  1. It is used to measure P.D between two points.
  2. Resistance of ideal voltmeter is infinity.
  3. It is connected in parallel in the circuits.

Question 8.
What is the principle of a moving coil galvanometer ?
Answer:
Moving coil galvanometer is based on the fact that when a current carrying coil is placed in a uniform magnetic field, it experiences a torque.
∴ current in the coil (i) ∝ deflecting angle (θ).

Question 9.
What is the smallest value of current that can be measured with a moving coil galvanometer ?
Answer:
Moving coil galvanometer is sensitive galvanometer, it is used to measure very small current upto 10-9A.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 10.
How do you convert a moving coil galvanometer into an ammeter ? (A.P. Mar. ’19)
Answer:
A small resistance is connected in parallel to the moving coil galvanometer, then it converts to Ammeter.
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{G}}{\frac{\mathrm{i}}{\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{g}}}-1}\)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 1

Question 11.
How do you convert a moving coil galvanometer into a voltmeter? (T.S. & A.P. Mar. ’16, T.S. Mar. ’15 Mar. ’14)
Answer:
A high resistance is connected in series to the moving coil galvanometer, then it converts to voltmeter.
R = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{g}}}-\mathrm{G}\)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 2

Question 12.
What is the relation between the permittivity of free space e0, the permeability of free space m0 and the speed of light in vacuum ?
Answer:
Speed of light in vacuum (C) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mu_0 \varepsilon_0}}\)
Here μ0 = m0 = permeability in vacuum
ε0 = permittivity in vacuum.

Question 13.
A current carrying circular loop lies on a smooth horizontal plane. Can a uniform magnetic field be set up in such a manner that the loop turns about the vertical axis ?
Answer:
Torque \((\tau)\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = i\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) (M = n i A)
where i is current, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is area vector, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is magnetic field. Area vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) acts normal to the loop, so torque \(\vec{\tau}\) cannot act along the vertical axis. The magnetic field is not set up to turn the loop around it self.

Question 14.
A current carrying circular loop is placed in a uniform external magnetic field. If the loop is free to turn, what is its orientation when it is achieves stable equilibrium ?
Answer:
The plane of the loop is perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field because the torque on the loop in this orientation is zero.

Question 15.
A wire loop of Irregular shape carrying current is placed In an external magnetic field. If the wire is flexible, what shape will the loop change to ? Why?
Answer:
For a given perimeter, a circle has maximum area among all geometrical shapes. So to maximise tie magnetic flux through it will assume a circular shape with its plane normal to the field.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State and explain Biot-Savart law. (T.S. Mar. ’16, Mar. ’14)
Answer:
Consider a very small element of length dl of a conductor carrying current

Magnetic induction due to small element at a point P distance r form the element. Magnetic induction (dB) is directly proportional to

    1. current (i)
    2. Length of the element (dl)
    3.  sine angle between r and dl and
    4. Inversely proportional to the square of the distance from small element to point R
      AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 3
      dB ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{id} l \sin \theta}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
      dB = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{id} l \sin \theta}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
      where μ = permeability in free space.
      \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\) = 10-7 Wb m-1 A-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 2.
State and explain Ampere’s law.
Answer:
Ampere’s law : The line integral of the intensity of magnetic induction field around closed path is equal to μ0 times the net current (i) enclosed by the path.
\(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}\) = μ0i
Proof: Consider a long” straight conductor carrying current i as shown in figure. Magnetic induction at a distance r from the conductor is given by
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 4
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) (from Biot-Savart’s law)
The value of B is same at all points on the circle.
\(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}\) = \(\oint \mathrm{Bd} l \cos \theta\)
= \(\mathrm{B} \oint \mathrm{d} l\) = B × 2πr (∵ θ = 0° Angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) & \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}\) is zero)
= \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) × 2πr
\(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}\) = μ0i.
This proves Ampere’s circuital laws.

Question 3.
Find the magnetic induction due to a long current carrying conductor.
Answer:
Consider a long straight conductor carrying a current i. Let P be a point at a distance r from the conductor. Let r be the radius of the circle passing through point p.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 5
(∵ \(\oint \mathrm{d} l\) = 2πr = circumference of the circle)
Magnetic induction is same at all points on the circle. Consider a small element of length dl.
\(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}\) = \(\oint \mathrm{Bd} l \cos \theta\)
Angle between B and dl is zero i.e. θ = 0
= B\(\oint \mathrm{dl}\)
\(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}\) = B (2πr) ——> (1)
According to Ampere’s laws
\(\oint \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}\) = µ0i ——-> (2)
From equations (1) and (2), B (2πr) = µ0 i
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)

Question 4.
Derive an expression for the magnetic induction at the centre of a current carrying circular coil using Biot-Savart law.
Answer:
Consider a circular coil of radius r and carry a current i. Consider a small element ‘dl’. Let O is the centre of the coil. By using Biot – Savart’s law
dB = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{i} d l \sin \theta}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
Here angle \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} t}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) is 90° (i.e. θ = 90°)
dB = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{id} l}{\mathrm{r}^2}\) — (1)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 6
As the field due to all elements of the circular loop have the same direction.
The resultant magnetic field can be obtained by integrating equation (1)
\(\int \mathrm{dB}\) = \(\int \frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{id} l}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}^2} \int \mathrm{d} l\) ∵ (\(\int\)dl = 2πr)
= \(\frac{\mu 0 \mathrm{i}}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}^2}\) × 2πr
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \mathrm{r}}\)
If the circular coil has n turns.
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{ni}}{2 \mathrm{r}}\)

Question 5.
Derive an expression for the magnetic induction a point on the axis of a current carrying circular coil using
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 7
Consider a circular coil of radius R and carrying a current i. Let P is a point on the axis at a distance x from the centre O. Let r be the distance of small element (dl) from P.
From Biot – savart’s law
dB = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\text { id } l \sin \theta}{r^2}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{id} l}{\mathrm{r}^2}\) —– (1) (∵ θ = 90° Angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\))
dB can be resolved into two components dB cos θ and dB sinθ. If we consider another element diametrically opposite to AB.
This also resolved into dB cosθ and dB sinθ.
The components along the axis will add up and perpendicular to the axis will cancel.
∴ Resultant magnetic induction at P is
B = \(\int \frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{id} l \sin \theta}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
= \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 \pi^2} \int d / \sin \theta\) (∵ sin θ = \(\frac{R}{r}\))
= \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}^2}\) × 2πR × \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{r}}\) (∵ \(\int dl\) = 2πr)
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{iR}^2}{2 \mathrm{r}^3}\) —–> (3)
From figure r = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{R}^2+\mathrm{x}^2}\)
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 i R^2}{2\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\) —–> (4)
If the coil contains N turns,
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 N i R^2}{2\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\) —–> (5)

Question 6.
Obtain an expression for the magnetic dipole moment of current loop.
Answer:
We know that magnetic induction on the axial line of a circular coil is B = \(\frac{\mu_0 N \mathrm{iR}^2}{2\left(\mathrm{R}^2+\mathrm{x}^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
where N = Number of turns in the coil
R = Radius of the coil
x = Distance from centre of the coil
i = Current in a coil
If x >> R, Then B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ni} \mathrm{R}^2}{2 \mathrm{x}^3}\)
Multiplying and dividing with 2π
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ni} \mathrm{R}^2}{2 \mathrm{x}^3} \times \frac{2 \pi}{2 \pi}\)
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{Ni}\left(\pi \mathrm{R}^2\right)}{\mathrm{x}^3}\) (∵ A = πR2)
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{Ni} \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{x}^3}\) —– (1)
We know that magnetic induction field on the axial line of a bar magnet
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{x}^3}\) —– (2)
Comparing the equations (1) and (2)
Magnetic moment (M) = N i A

Question 7.
Derive an expression for the magnetic dipole moment of a revolving electron. (Ã.P. Mar. ’16)
Answer:
Consider an electron revolving in a circular orbit of radius r with speed v and frequency υ.
If the electron cross a point P on the circle in every revolution, then distance travelled by electron to complete one revolution = 2πr.
No. of revolutions in one second (υ) = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{2 \pi r}\)
The electric current (i) = \(\frac{\text { charge }}{\text { time }}\) = charge × frequency
i = e × \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
∴ Magnetic dipole moment (M) = I A (∵ N = 1)
M = \(\frac{\mathrm{ev}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}} \times \pi \mathrm{r}^2\) (∵ A = πr2)
M = \(\frac{\text { evr }}{2}\)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 8.
Explain how crossed E and B fields serve as a velocity selector.
Answer:
When a charged particle q moving with a velocity v in presence of both electric and magnetic fields.
The force experienced due to electric field FE = q\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}\)
The force experienced due to magnetic field FB = q \(\left(\begin{array}{l}
\vec{v} \times \vec{B}
\end{array}\right)\)
Consider electric and magnetic fields are perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to the velocity of the particle.
E = E\(\hat{j}\), B = B\(\hat{k}\), v = v\(\hat{i}\)
FE = qE\(\hat{j}\), FB = q (v\(\hat{i}\) × B\(\hat{k}\)) = – qvB\(\hat{j}\)
∴ F = FE + FB
F = q (E – υB) \(\hat{j}\)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 8
Thus electric and magnetic forces are in opposite directions.
We adjust E and B such that, the forces are equal
FE = FB
qE’ = q υ B
υ = \(\frac{E}{B}\)
This condition can be used to select charged particles of a particular velocity. The crossed field E and B serve as a velocity selector.

Question 9.
What are the basic components of a cyclotron ? Mention its uses ?
Answer:
Cyclotron is a device used to accelerate positively charged particles like protons, α – particles, deutrons etc.

Cyclotron mainly consists of

  1. Two hollow D-shaped metallic chambers D1 and D2
  2. High frequency oscillator
  3. Strong electro magnet
  4. Vacuum chamber.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 9

Uses of cyclotron :

  1. It is used for producing radioactive material for medical purposes i.e. diagnostics and treatment of chronic diseases.
  2. It is used to improve the quality of solids by adding ions.
  3. It is used to synthesise fresh substances.
  4. It is used to bombard the atoms with highly accelerated particles to study the nuclear reactions.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Deduce an expression for the force on a current carrying conductor placed in a magnetic field. Derive an expression for the force per unit length between two parallel current carrying conductors.
Answer:
Expression for the Force acting on a current carrying conductor :
Consider a straight conductor (wire) of length ‘l’, area of cross section ‘A’, carrying a current ’i’, ‘which is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction B’ as shown in fig.
We know the external magnetic field exerts a force on the conductor.
The electrons in effect move with an average velocity called drift velocity Vd‘. The direction of conventional current will be opposite to the direction of drift velocity.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 10
Let us assume that the current flows through the conductor from left ‘B’ in the plane of the paper makes an angle ‘θ’ with the direction of current ‘i’ as shown in fig.

If F’ is the force acting on the charge ‘q’ in B
∴ F = q Vd B sin θ
If ‘n’ represents number of moving electrons per unit volume (∵ n = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{V}}\))
∴ Current i = nqVdA
If ‘N’ is the number of electrons in the length ‘l’
N = nlA .
Total force on conductor F = F’.N (∵ N = nV = n × A × l)
= (q VdB sin θ) (nlA)
= (nqVdA) (IB sin θ)
∴ F = ilB sin θ
Case (i) : If θ = 0°, FMin = 0
Case (ii) : If θ = 90°, FMax = Bil

Expression for the force between two Parallel conductors carrying conductors:
Consider two straight parallel conductors .‘AB and ‘CD’ carrying currents ‘i1’ and “i2’ and which are separated by a distance ‘r’ as shown in fig.

If B1 and B2 are magnetic inductions produced by the current carrying conductors AB and CD. Magnetic induction B1 at a distance ‘r’ from the conductor ‘AB’ can be written as B1 = \(\frac{\mu_0 i_1}{2 \pi r}\)
If ‘F is force acting on CD’ due to magnetic induction B1 then
FCD = i2lB1
Where l = length of the conductor
FCD = \(\mathrm{i}_2 l\left(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\right)\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 l}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) — (1)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 11
The direction of the force can be determined by using Flemings left hand rule.
Similarly we can find the force acting on the conductor AB due to magnetic induction B2.
FAB = i1lB2
∴ FAB = \(\mathrm{i}_1 l\left(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\right)\) —– (2) [∵ B2 = \(\frac{\mu_0 i_2}{2 \pi r}\)]
From the equations (1) and (2) FAB = FCD = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 l}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
∴ Force between two parallel, straight conductors carrying currents
F = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 l}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
Force per unit length \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{l}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)

Question 2.
Obtain an expression for the torque on a current carrying loop placed in a uniform magnetic field. Describe the construction and working of a moving coil galvanometer.
Answer:
Torque acting on a coil carrying a current kept in a uniform magnetic field : Let a rectangular current loop ABCD of length l = AB = CD and width b = AD = BC carrying a current “i” be suspended in a magnetic field of flux density B.
The normal ON drawn to the plane of the coil makes an angle ‘θ’ with the magnetic field B.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 12
Force on arm AD = i\(\overline{\mathrm{b}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) acting upwards along the axis of suspension
Force on arm BC = i\(\overline{\mathrm{b}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) acting downwards along the axis of suspension
Hence these two forces cancel.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 13
Force on arm AB = ilB acting perpendicular to the plane as shown.
Force on arm CD = ilB acting perpendicular to the plane as shown.
These two forces constitute a couple on the coil.
Moment of the couple = (Force) × (Perpendicular distance between the forces) = i/B (PQ sin θ)
Torque = ilB b sinθ
But l × b = Area of coil
∴ Torque = iAB sin θ
If the loop has n’ turns the torque on the coil
\(\tau\) = n i AB sinθ
If “ϕ’ is the deflection of the coil, that is the angle between the plane of the coil and magnetic field B
\(\tau\) = n i AB cos ϕ

Moving coil galvanometer:
Principle : When a current carrying coil is placed in the uniform magnetic field, it experiences a torque.

Construction: .

  1. It consists of a coil wound on a non metallic frame.
  2. A rectangular coil is suspended between two concave shaped magnetic poles with the help of phosphour Bronze wire.
  3. The lower portion of the coil ‘is connected to a spring.
  4. A small plane mirror M is fixed to the phosphour Bronze wire to measure the deflection of the coil.
  5. A small soft iron cylinder is placed with in the coil without touching the coil. ‘The soft iron cylinder increases the induction field strength.
  6. The concave shaped magnetic poles render the field radial. So maximum torque acting on it.
  7. The whole of the apparatus is kept inside a brass case provided with a glass window.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 14

Theory:
Consider a rectangular coil of length l and breadth b and carrying current i suspended in the induction field strength B.
Deflecting torque \((\tau)\) = B i A N —–> (5)

where A = Area of the coil
N = Total number of turns.
The restoring torque developed in the suspension = C θ —-> (2)
Where C is the couple per unit twist and θ is the deflection made by the coil. When the coil is in equilibrium position
Deflecting torque = Restoring torque
B i A N = C θ
i = \(\left(\frac{C}{\mathrm{BAN}}\right) \theta\)
Where K = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}}{\mathrm{BAN}}\) = Galvanometer constant
i = K θ —-> (3)
i ∝ θ
Thus deflection of the coil is directly proportional to the current flowing through it.
The deflection in the coil is measured using lamp and scale arrangement.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 3.
How can a galvanometer be converted fo an ammeter ? Why is the parallel resistance smaller that the galvanometer resistance ?
Answer:
Conversion of Galvanometer into Ammeter :
Galvanometer is converted into an ammeter by connecting a suitable resistance is parallel to it.
This arrangement decreases the effective resistance.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 15
Ammeter is used for measuring the current in an electric circuit and it is connected in series in circuit.
The inclusion of the ammeter in the circuit should not alter the current or total resistance of the circuit so it has very low resistance.
The resistance of An ideal Ammeter is zero.
Let G and S be the Galvanometer and shunt resistances respectively.
Let ‘i’ be the total current, divided at A into ig and is as shown in fig.
From Kirchhoff’s Ist law i = ig + is
As ‘G’ and ‘S’ are parallel
PD. across Galvanometer = P.D. across shunt
ig G = is S
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{g}}}{\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{s}}} \mathrm{G}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{Gi}_{\mathrm{g}}}{\mathrm{i}-\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{g}}}\) [∵ is = i – ig]
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{G}}{\frac{\mathrm{i}}{\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{g}}}-1}\)
If \(\frac{\mathrm{i}}{\mathrm{i}_g}\) = n ⇒ ig = \(\frac{i}{n}\)
∴ The current flowing through the galvanometer be \(\left(\frac{1}{n}\right)^{\text {th }}\) of total current.
∴ S = \(\frac{\mathrm{G}}{\mathrm{n}-1}\)
If ‘R is the effective resistance between points ‘A’ and ‘B’ then
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 16

Hence current through galvanometer is proportional to the total current. Since ‘S’ is small major portion of the current flows through it and a small portion of current flows through G. So shunt protects the galvanometer from high currents. Parallel resistance is smaller than Galvanometer resistance because to protect the Galvanometer from high (large) current (or) to pass. Large currents through shunt and small current passes through the galvanometer.

Question 4.
How can a galvanometer be converted to a voltmeter ? Why is the series resistance greater that the galvanometer resistance ?
Answer:
Conversion of Galvanometer into, Voltmeter: A galvanometer-is converted into voltmeter by connecting a high resistance (R) in series with it. Voltmeter is used to measure the RD. between any two points in circuit and it is connected in parallel to the component of the circuit.

Let V be the potential difference to be measured between the points ‘A’ and ‘B’.
∴ V = (R + G) ig [∴ V = iR]
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 17
Where G = Galvanometer Resistance
ig = Current passing through the galvanometer
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{i}_g}\) = R + G
∴ R = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{i}_g}\) – G —- (1)
The value of ‘R’ can be calculated by using the above formula. If Vg is the maximum P.D. across the galvanometer then Vg = ig G
∴ ig = \(\frac{V_g}{G}\) —— (2)
Substitute ‘ig‘ in Equ (1)
R = \(\frac{V G}{V_g}\) – G = G\(\left(\frac{V}{V_g}-1\right)\)
If \(\frac{V}{V_g}\) = n ⇒ R = G(n – 1)
Note: n = \(\frac{V}{V_g}\) is the ratio of maximum voltage to be measured to the maximum voltage across the galvanometer
Series resistance is greater than galvanometer resistance because the current in external resistance and potential difference will be decreased and to increase the resistance of the galvanometer.

Question 5.
Derive an expression for the force acting between two very long parallel current-carrying conductors and hence define the Ampere.
Answer:
Force between two parallel conductors carrying current:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 18
Let two long parallel conductors A and B seperated by a distance r carry currents i1 and i2 in the same directions.
The current i1 produces magnetic induction around the conductor A and the current i2 produces magnetic induction B2 around the conductor B.
If l is the length of each conductor,
The magnetic induction B1 at distance r from conductor A is
B1 = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) — (1)
The force on conductor B is given by
F2 = i2 l B1 —- (2)
The direction of force is given by Fleming left hand rule
F2 = i2l × \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 l}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) —- (3)
The direction of force F2 is towards conductor A. Similary the magnetic induction B2 at distance r from conductor B is
B2 = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) — (4)
The force on conductor A is given by
F1 = i1lB2 —- (5)
Substituting B2 value in equation (5)
F1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{i}_1 l \times \mu_0 \mathrm{i}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
F1 = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 l}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) — (6)
It can be seen that | F1| = | F2| = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 l}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
The force per unit length of the conductor is given by
\(\frac{F}{l}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) —–>(7)

Definition of Ampere:
If i1 = i2 = 1A, r = 1m
F/l = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1 \times 1}{2 \pi \times 1}\) = 2 × 10-7 Nm-1
“When two infinitely long parallel conductors, carrying the same current are seperated by 2 × 10-7 Nm-1, then the current flowing through each conductor is said to be one Ampere”.

Problems

Question 1.
A current of 10A passes through two very long wires held parallel to each other and separated by a distance of 1m. What is the force per unit length between them ? (T.S. Mar. ’19 & A.P. & T.S. Mar. ’15)
Solution:
i1 = i2 = 10A
r = 1m
\(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{l}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
= \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 10 \times 10}{2 \pi \times 1}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{l}}\) = 2 × 10-5 Nm-1.

Question 2.
A moving coil galvanometer can measure a current of 10-6 A. What is the resistance of the shunt required if it is to measure 1A ?
Solution:
Galvanometer current (ig) = 10-6A
i = 1A
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{G}}{\frac{\mathrm{i}}{\mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{g}}}-1}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{G}}{\frac{1}{10^{-6}}-1}\)
S = \(\frac{G}{10^6-1}\)
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{G}}{99,999} \Omega\)
Where G = Galvanometer resistance.

Question 3.
A circular wire loop of radius 30 cm carries a current of 3.5 A. Find the magnetic field at a point on its axis 40 cm away from the centre.
Solution:
Radius (r) = 30 cm = 30 × 10-2m
Current (i) = 3.5 A
x = 40 cm = 40 × 10-2m
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 19

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
A circular coil of wire consisting of 100 turns, each of radius 8.0 cm carries a current of 0.40 A. What is the magnitude of the magnetic field B at the centre of the coil ?
Solution:
Here, n = 100, r = 8cm = 8 × 10-2 m and I = 0.40 A
The magnetic field B at the centre
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \pi \mathrm{In}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{10^{-7} \times 2 \times 3.14 \times 0.4 \times 100}{8 \times 10^{-2}}\) = 3.1 × 10-4T
The direction of magnetic field depends on the direction of current if the direction of current is anticlockwise. According to Maxwell’s right hand rule, the direction of magnetic field at the centre of coil will be perpendicular outwards to the plane of paper.

Question 2.
A long straight wire carries a current of 35 A. What is the magnitude of the field B at a point 20 cm from the wire ?
Solution:
Here, I = 35 A and r = 20 cm = 0.2 m
The wire is along and it is considered as an infinite length wire. The magnetic field
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{10^{-7} \times 2 \times 35}{0.2}\) = 3.5 × 10-5T

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 3.
A long straight wire in the horizontal plane carries a current of 50 A in north to south direction. Give the magnitude and direction of B at a point 2.5 m east of the wire.
Solution:
Given I = 50A and r = 2.5 m
The magnitude of magnetic field
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 20
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 I}{r}\) = 10-7 × \(\frac{2 \times 50}{2.5}\)
= 4 × 10-6T
The direction of magnetic field at point P is given by Maxwell’s right hand rule.

Question 4.
A horizontal overhead power line carries a current of 90 A in east to west direction. What is the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field due to the current 1.5 m below the line ?
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 21
Given I = 90 A and r = 1.5m
The magnitude of magnetic field
B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{10^{-7} \times 2 \times 90}{1.5}\)
= 1.2 × 10-5 T
The direction of magnetic flux is given by Maxwell’s right hand rule. So, the direction of magnetic field at point P due to the following current is perpendicularly outwards to the plane of paper.

Question 5.
What is the magnitude of magnetic force per unit length on a wire carrying a current of 8A and making an angle of 300 with the direction of a uniform magnetic field of 0.15.T?
Solution:
According to the question
I = 8 A, θ = 30°, B = 0.15 T, l = 1 m
The magnitude of magnetic force
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 22
f = I(l × B) = I l B sin θ
= 8 × 1 × 0.15 × sin 30°
= \(\frac{8 \times 0.15}{2}\) = 4 × 0.15 = 0.6 N/m

Question 6.
A 3.0 cm wire carrying a current of 10 A is placed inside a solenoid perpendicular to its axis. The magnetic field inside the solenoid is given to be 0.27 T. What is the magnetic force on the wire ?
Solution:
Here, the angle between the magnetic field and the direction of flow of current is 90°. Because the magneitc field due to a solenoid is along the axis of solenoid and the wire is placed perpendicular to the axis.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 23
Given, l = 3 cm = 3 × 10-2 m, I = 10A, B = 0.27 T
f = I l B sin 90°
= 10 × 3 × 10-2 × 0.27 = 8.1 × 10-2 N
According to right hand palm rule, the direction of magnetic force is perpendicular to plane of paper inwards.

Question 7.
Two long and parallel straight wires A and B carrying currents of 8.0 A and 5.0 A in the same direction are separated by a distance of 4.0 cm. Estimate the force on a 10 cm section of wire A.
Solution:
Given I1 = 8A, I2 = 5A and r = 4 cm = 0.4m
F = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{I}_1 \mathrm{I}_2}{\mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{10^{-7} \times 2 \times 8 \times 5}{0.04}\) = 2 × 10-4N
The force on A of length 10 cm is F1 = F × 0.1 (∵ 1m = 100 cm)
F1 = 2 × 10-4 × 0.1
F1 = 2 × 10-5N.

Question 8.
A closely wound solenoid 80 cm long has 5 layers of windings of 400 turns each. The diameter of the solenoid is 1.8 cm. It the current carried is 8.0 A, estimate the magnitude of B inside the solenoid near its centre.
Solution:
The length of solenoid, l = 80 cm = 0.8 m
Number of layers = 5
Number of turns per layer = 400
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 24
Diameter of solenoid = 1.8 cm
Current in solenoid = I = 8 A
∴ The total number of turns N = 400 × 5 = 2000
and no. of turns / length, n = \(\frac{2000}{0.8}\) = 2500
The magnitude of magnetic field inside the solenoid
B = μ0nl = 4 × 3 .14 10-7 × 2500 × 8
= 2. 5 × 10-2 T
The direction of magnetic field is along the axes of solenoid.

Question 9.
A square coil of side 10 cm consists of 20 turns and carries current of 12 A. The coil is suspended vertically and the normal to the plane of the coil makes an angle of 30° with the direction of a uniform horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 0.80 T. What is the magnitude of torque experienced by the coil ?
Solution:
Given, side of square coil = 10 cm = 0.1 m
Number of turns (n) = 20
current in square coil I = 12 A
Angle made by coil θ = 30°
Magnetic filed B = 0.80 T
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 25
The magnitude of torque experienced by the coil
\(\tau\) = NIAB sinθ
= 20 × 12 × (10 × 10-2)2 × 0.80 × sin 30°
= 0.96 N – m

Question 10.
Two moving coil meters, M1 and M2 have the following particulars :
R1 = 10 Ω, n1 = 30,
A1 = 3.6 × 10-3 m2, B1 = 0.25 T
R2 = 14Ω, n2 = 42,
A2 = 1.8 × 10-3 m2, B2 = 0.50 T, K1 = K2
(The spring constants are identical for the two meters).
Determine the ratio of (a) current sensitivity and (b) voltage sensitivity of M2 and M1.
Solution:
Given, R1 = 10 Ω, N1 = 30, A1 = 3.6 × 10-3 m2, B1 = 0.25 T
R2 = 140Ω, n2 = 42, A2 = 1.8 × 10-3 m2, B2 = 0.50 T, K1 = K2
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 26

Question 11.
In a chamber, a uniform magnetic field of 6.5 G (1 G = 10-4 T) is maintained. An electron is shot into the field with a speed of 4.8 × 106 m s-1 normal to the field. Explain why the path of the electron is a circle. Determine the radius of the circular orbit.
(e = 1.5 × 10-19 C, me = 9.1 × 10-31 kg)
Solution:
Given, magnetic field B = 6.5 G = 6.5 × 10-4 T
Charge e = -1.6 × 10-19 C
Speed of electron V = 4.8 × 106 m/s
Mass of electron me = 9.1 × 10-31 kg
Angle between magnetic field and electron (θ) = 90°
The force on charge particle entering in the magnetic field
F = q (V × B) = e (V × b)
The electron attains a circular path and necessarily centripetal force is provided by magnetic force.
e (V × B) = \(\frac{m V^2}{r}\)
e V B sin 90° = \(\frac{\mathrm{m} \mathrm{V}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\)
r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mV}}{\mathrm{e} \mathrm{B} \times 1}\) = \(\frac{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 4.8 \times 10^6}{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 6.5 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 4.2 × 10-2m = 4.2 cm

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 12.
From Exercise 11 data, obtain the frequency of revolution of the electron in its circular orbit. Does the answer depend on the speed of the electron ? Explain.
Solution:
Given
B = 6.5 G = 6.5 × 10-4T, V = 4.8 × 106 m/s, e = 1.6 × 10-19C
me = 9.1 × 10-3 kg
\(\frac{\mathrm{mV}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\) = q V B ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{mV}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = qB
If angular velocity of electron is ω, then
V = r ω
ω = \(\frac{\mathrm{qB}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
2πn = \(\frac{\mathrm{qB}}{\mathrm{m}}\) ⇒ n = \(\frac{\mathrm{qB}}{2 \pi \mathrm{m}}\)
Frequency of revolution of electron in orbit
υ = \(\frac{\mathrm{Bq}}{2 \pi \mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{Be}}{2 \pi \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\) = \(\frac{6.5 \times 10^{-4} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{2 \times 3.14 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31}}\) = 18.18 × 106 Hz.

Question 13.
(a) Circular coil of 30 turns and radius 8.0 cm carrying a current of 6.0 A is suspended vertically in a uniiorm horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 1.0 T. The field lines make an angle of 60° with the normal of the coil. Calculate the magnitude of the counter torque that must be applied to prevent the coil form turning.
(b) Would your answer change, If the circular coil in (a) were replaced by a planar coil of some irregular shape that encloses the same area ? (All other particular are also unaltered.)
Answer:
a) Given, no. of turns (n) = 30, radius (r) = 8 cm = 0.08 m
Current in coil (I) = 6A, Magnetic field (B) = 1.0 T,
Angle made by field with the normal of the coil, θ = 60°
\(\tau\) = n I A Bsinθ
= 30 × 6 × π (0.08)2 × 1 × sin 60°
= 30 × 6 × 3.14 × 0.08 × 0.08 × \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
\(\tau\) = 3.133 N – m

b) From the formula, it is clear that the torque on the loop does not depend on the shape if area remains constant. So, the torque remains constant.

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
Two concentric circular coils X and Y of radii 16 cm and 10 cm, respectively, lie in the same vertical plane containing the north to south direction. Coil X has 20 turns and carries a current of 16 A; coil Y has 25 turns and carries a current of 18 A. The sense of the current in X Is anticlockwise, and clockwise In Y, for an observer looking at the coils facing west. Give the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field due to the coils at their centre.
Solution:
For coil X
Radius of coil, rx = 16 cm = 0.16 m
No. of turns nx = 20
Current in the coil Ix = 16A (Anti clockwise) .
For coil Y
Radius of coil, ry = 10 cm = 0.1 m
No. of turns ny = 25
Current in the coil Iy = 18 A (clockwise)
The magnitude of the magnetic field at the centre of coil X
Bx = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 I_x \cdot \pi n_x}{r_x}\) = \(\frac{10^{-7} \times 2 \times 16 \times 3.14 \times 20}{0.16} \mathrm{~T}\)
Bx = 4π × 10-4T
The magnitude field at the centre B =By – Bx
= (9π – 4π) × 10-4 = 5π × 10-4
= 1.6 × 10-3T (towards west)

Question 2.
A magnetic field of 1oo G (1 G = 10-4 T) is required which is uniform in a region of linear dimension about 10 cm and area of cross-section about 10-3 m2. The maximum current carrying capacity of a given coil of wire is 15 A and the number of turns per unit length that can be wound round a côre is at most 1000 turns m-1. Suggest some appropriate design particulars of a solenoid for the required purpose. Assume the core is not ferromagnetic.
Solution:
Magnetic field B = 100 G = 100 × 10-4T = 10-2 T
Maximum current I = 15A, n = 1000/m.
The magnitude of magnetic field B = μ0 nI
nI = \(\frac{\mathrm{B}}{\mu_0}\) = \(\frac{10^{-2}}{4 \times 3.14 \times 10^{-7}}\)
⇒ nI = 7961 ≈ 8000
Here; the product of n I is 8000. So,
Current I = 8A and no. of turns = 1000
The other design is I = 10A and n = 800/m. This is the most appropriate design as the requirement.

Question 3.
For a circular coil of radius R and N turns carrying current I, the magnitude of the magnetic field at a point on its axis at a distance x from Its centre is given by,
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathbf{I R}^2 \mathbf{N}}{2\left(\mathbf{x}^2+\mathbf{R}^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
a) Show that this reduces to the familiar result for field at the centre of the coil.
Solution:
Given, magnetic field at distance x :
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NIR}^2}{2\left(\mathrm{x}^2+\mathrm{R}^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\) (∵ x = 0)
∴ The magnetic field at the centre B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{~N} \mathrm{I} \mathrm{R}^2}{2 \mathrm{R}^3}\)
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{~N} \mathrm{I}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)
This result is same as the magnetic field due to current loop at its centre.

b) Consider two parallel co-axial circular coils of equal radius R, and number of turns N, carrying equal currents in the same direction, and separated bya distance R. Show that the field on the axis around the mid-point between the coils is uniform over a distance that is small as compared to R, and is given by, B = 072\(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI}}{\mathrm{R}}\) approximately.
ISuch an arrangement to produce a nearly uniform magnetic field over a small region is known as Helmholtz coils.] :
Solution:
Radius of two parallel co-axial coils = R, number of turns = N Current = I
Let the mid points between the coils is at point O and P be the pomt around the mid point O.
Suppose, the distance between OP = d which is very less than R (d < < R)
For the Coil A,
OAP = \(\frac{R}{2}\) + d
the magnetic field at point P due to coil A.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 27
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 28
as according to the question d < <R, so neglect turn d2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 29
The direction of BA is along POB. According to Maxwell’s right hand rule
for the coil B, OBP = (Rl2 – d)
The magnetic field at point P due to coil B
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 30
The direction of magnetic field BB is towards POB. So, the resultant magnetic field at P due to coil A and coil B is
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 31
Now, use binomial theorem and neglect higher power as d < < R
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 32

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 4.
A toroid has a core (non-ferromagnetic) of inner radius 25 cm and outer radius 26 cm, around whIch 3500 turns of a wire are wound. If the current in the wire Is 11 A, what is the magnetic field (a) outside the toroid, (b) inside the core of the toroid, and (c) in the empty space surrounded by the toroid.
Solution:
a) For outside the toroid, the magnetic field is zero, because the magnetic field due to toroid is only inside it and along the length of toroid.

b) Inner radius of toroid, r1 = 25 cm = 0.25 m
Outer radius of toroid, r2 = 26 cm = 0.26 m
Number of turns N = 3500
current in the wire, I = 11A
The mean radius of toroid r = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{r}_1+\mathrm{r}_2}{2}\right)\) = \(\frac{2}{2}\)(0.25 + 0.26) = 0.51
∴ length of toroid = 2πr = 2π × 0.51
the magnetic field strength due to toroid is B = µ0 n I
where n is number of turns per unit length
n = \(\frac{N}{I}\)
B = 4π × 10-7 × \(\frac{3500}{\pi \times 0.51}\) × 11 = 3.02 × 10-2 T

c) The magnetic field in the empty space surrounded by toroid is also zero, because the
magnetic field due to toroid is only along its length.

Question 5.
Answer the following questions.
a) A magnetic field that varies in magnitude form point to point but has a constant direction (east to west) is set up in a chamber. A charged particle enters the chamber and travels undeflected along a straight path with constant speed. What can you say about the initial velocity of the particle?
Answer:
The magnetic field is in constant direction from east to west. According to the question, a charged particle travels undeflected along a striaght path with constant speed. It is only possible, if the magnetic force experienced by the charged particle is zero. The magnitude of magnetic force on a moving charged particle in a magnetic field is given by F = qvB sin θ. Here F = 0, if and only if sinθ. This indicates the angle between the velocity and magnetic fled is 0° or 180°. Thus, the charged particle moves parallel or antiparallel to the magnetic field B.

b) A charged particle enters an environment of a strong and non-uniform magnetic field varying from point to point both in magnitude and direction, and comes out of it following a complicated trajectory Would its final speed equal the initial speed lilt suffered no collisions with the environment?
Answer:
Yes, the final speed be equal to its initial speed as the magnetic force acting on the charged particle only changes the direction of velocity of charged particle but cannot change the magnitude of velocity of charged particle.

c) An electron travelling west to east enters a chamber having a uniform electrostatic field in north to south direction. Specify the direction in which a uniform magnetic field should be set up to prevent the electron from deflecting from its straight line path.
Solution:
B should be in a vertically downward direction.

Question 6.
An electron emitted by a heated cathode and accelerated through a potential difference of 2.0 kV, enters a region with uniform magnetic field of 0.15 T. Determine the trajectory of the electron if the field (a) is transverse to its initial velocity, (b) makes an angle of 30° with the initial velocity.
Solution:
a) Since magnetic field is perpendicular to initial velocity of electron therefore, the electron will move in circular path.
B = 0.15 T,PD = 200 V
K. E. of electron = eV = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv2
V2 = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{ev}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
V = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 2000}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}}}\)
V = \(\frac{8}{3}\) (e = charge of electron)
V = 2.66 × 107 m/s
Also
BqV = \(\frac{\mathrm{m} \mathrm{V}^2}{\mathrm{Br}}\)
∴ r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}}{\mathrm{Bq}}\)
or r = \(\frac{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 2.66 \times 10^7}{0.15 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= \(\frac{91 \times 83.86 \times 10^{-5}}{15 \times 1.6}\) = 10-3 m = 1 mm

b) When magnetic field makes an angle 30° with the initial velocity i.e. θ = 30°
Then V1 = V sin θ = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{ev}}{\mathrm{m}}}\) = sin 30°
V1 = \(\frac{8}{3}\) × 107 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\) × 107 m/s
The radius of the helical path is
r = \(\frac{\mathrm{m} \mathrm{V}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{Be}}\)
= \(\frac{9 \times 10^{-31} \times\left(\frac{4}{3} \times 10^7\right)}{0.15 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 0.5 mm

Question 7.
A magnetic field set up using Helmholtz coils (described in Exercise 16) is uniform in a small region and has a magnitude of 0.75 T. In the same region, a uniform electrostatic field is maintained in a direction normal to the common axis of the coils. A narrow beam of (single species) charged particles all accelerated through 15 kV enters this region in a direction perpendicular to both the axis of the coils and the electrostatic field. If the beam remains undeflected when the electrostatic field is 9.0 × 10-5 V m-1, make a simple guess as to what the beam contains. Why is the answer not unique ?
Solution:
B = 0.75 T, E = 9 × 105 Vm-1
V = \(\frac{E}{B}\) = \(\frac{9 \times 10^5}{0.75}\) = 12 × 106 m/s
K. E of charged particle
= \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2\) = eV
or \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{v^2}{2 v}\) = \(\frac{144 \times 10^{12}}{2 \times 15000}\) = 4.8 × 107C kg-1
Particle is deuteron; the answer is not unique because only the ratio of charge to mass is determined. Other possibe answers are He++, Li+++ etc.
∴ He++ and Li+++ also have the same value of
e/m (∵ e/m = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{e}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\) = \(\frac{3 \mathrm{e}}{3 \mathrm{~m}}\))

Question 8.
A straight horizontal conducting rod of length 0.45 m and mass 6 g is suspended by two vertical wires at its ends. A current of 5.0 A is set up in the rod through the wires.

a) What magnetic field should be set up normal to the conductor in order that the tension in the wires is zero?
Solution:
Rod carrying current placed in uniform magnetic field expëriences a force Bu which is balanced by weigth of rod
F = B I l
mg = B I l
B = \(\frac{\mathrm{m} \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{I} l}\) = \(\frac{60 \times 9.8}{1000 \times 0.45 \times 5}\) = 0.26 T

b) What will be the total tension in the wires if the direction of current is reversed keeping the magnetic field same as before? (Ignore the mass of the wires.) g = 9.8 m s-2.
Solution:
Force due to magnetic field = B I l
= 0.26 × 5 × 0.45 = 5.85 N
Weight of rod = \(\frac{60}{1000}\) × 9.8 = 0.588 N
Total force = 0.588 + 0.585 = 1.173 N

Question 9.
The wires which connect the battery of an automobile to its starting motor carry a current of 300 A (for a short time). What is the force per unit length between the wires if they are 70 cm long and 1.5 cm apart? Is the force attractive or repulsive?
Solution:
F = \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \times \frac{2 I_1 I_2}{r}\)
= 10-7 × \(\frac{2 \times 300 \times 300 \times 100}{1.5 \times 10^{-2}}\) = 1.2 Nm-1 (Repulsive force)

Question 10.
A uniform magnetic field of 1.5 T exists in a cylindrical region of radius 10.0 cm, its direction parallel to the axis along east to west. A wire carrying current of 7.0 A in the north to south direction passes through this region. What is the magnitude and direction of the force on the wire if,

a) the wire intersects the axis,
Solution:
F = BI 1 sin 900 = 1.5 × 7 × \(\frac{20}{100}\) = 2.1 N acting vertically downwards.

b) The wire is turned form N-S to north-east-northwest direction,
Solution:
Now θ = 45°, and length of the wire in the cylindrical region of the magnetic field is l, and is given by
l = l1 sin 45°
l1 = \(\frac{l}{\sin 45^{\circ}}\) = \(\sqrt{2 l}\)
So force F1 = BI l sin 45°
= 1.5 × 7.0 × \(\sqrt{2} l\) × \(\frac{l}{\sqrt{2}}\)
= 10.5 × 0.2 = 2.1 N

c) The wire in the N-S direction is lowered from the axis by a distance of 6.0 cm?
Solution:
When the wire is lowered through a distance 6.0 cm and reaches at CD then length of wire in magnetic field
l2 = 2x
x.x = 4 × (10 + 6) = 64
x = 8 cm
∴ l2 = 8 × 2 = 16 cm = \(\frac{16}{100}\)m
∴ Force on the wire
F2 = BI l2
= \(\frac{1.5 \times 7 \times 16}{100}\) = 1.68 N (Vertically downwards)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 11.
A uniform magnetic field of 3000 G is established along the positive z-direction. A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm and 5 cm carries a current of 12 A. What is the torque on the loop in the different cases shown in Fig. ? What is the force on each case ? Which case corresponds to stable equilibrium?
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Moving Charges and Magnetism 33
Solution:
a) Torque = 300, G = 3000 × 10-4 T
Area A = 10 × 5 = 50 cm2 = \(\frac{50}{100 \times 100}\)m2
\(\tau\) = BIA = \(\frac{3}{10}\) × 12 × \(\frac{50}{100 \times 100}\) = 18 × 10-2 Nm along Y-axis
b) Same as in (a)
c) 1.8 × 10-2 Nm along x – direction
d) 1.8 × 10-2 Nm at an angle 240° with the +x direction :
e) Zero
f) Zero
Force is zero in each case. Case (e) corresponds to stable and case (f) to unstable equilibrium.

Question 12.
A circular coil of 20 turns and radius 10 cm is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.10 T normal to the plane of the coil. 1f the current in the coil is 5.0 A, what is the
(a) total torque on the coil,
(b) total force on the coil,
(c) average force on each electron in the coil due to the magnetic field?
(The coil is made of copper wire of cross-sectional area 10-5 m2, and the free electron density in copper is given to be about 1029 m-3.)
Solution:
n = 20, r = 10 cm, B = 0.10 T, I = 50 A
a) Torque acting on the coil = nBIA sinθ = 0
b) Force acting on the coil = BIl sinθ = 0
e) Force on each electron
n = No. of electrons per unit volume
A = Area of cross – section of wire
F = Be V = \(\frac{\mathrm{BI}}{\mathrm{nA}}\) = \(\frac{0.1 \times 5}{10^{29} \times 10^{-5}}\) = 5 × 10-25N

Question 13.
A solenoid 60 cm long and of radius 7.0 cm has 3 layers of windings of 300 turns each. A 2.0 cm long wire of mass 2.5 g lies inside the solenoid (near its centre) normal to its axis; both the wire and the axis of the solenoid are in the horizontal plane. The wire is connected through two lead parallel to the axis of the solenoid to an external battery which supplies a current of 6.0 A in the wire. What value of current (with appropriate sense of circulation) in the windings of the solenoid can support the weight of the wire ? g = 9.8 m s-2.
Solution:
B = μ0n I
Force acts on the wire normal to its length
∴ F = BI1 l
= μ0n I I1 l and n = \(\frac{\frac{900}{60}}{100}\) = 1500
= μ0n I I1 l = mg
I = \(\frac{2.5 \times 9.8}{1000 \times 4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1500 \times 6 \times \frac{1}{15}}\) = 108 A.

Question 14.
A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 12 Ω and the metre shows full scale deflection for a current of 3 mA How will you convert the metre into a voltameter of range 0 to 18V ?
Solution:
Here G = 12Ω, Ig = 3mA = 3 × 10-3A, V = 18V
R = \(\frac{v}{I_g}\) – G = \(\frac{18}{3 \times 10^{-3}}\) – 12 = (6000 – 12)Ω = 5988 Ω.

Question 15.
A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 15 Ω and the meter shows full scale deflection for a current of 4 mA. How will you convert the meter into an ammeter of range 0 to 6 A?
Solution:
Here G = 15Ω, Ig = 4 mA = 0.004 A, I = 6A
shunt S = \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{g}} \mathrm{G}}{\mathrm{I}-\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{g}}}\) = \(\frac{0.004 \times 15}{6-0.004}\) = \(\frac{0.06}{5.996}\) = ≈ 10 × 10-3Ω = 10 m Ω
So shunt resistance = 10 m \(\simeq\) 10 mΩ

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 2 Structural Organisation in Animals Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
The body of sponges does not possess a tissue level of organisation, though it is made up of thousands of cells. Comment on it.
Answer:
Even though the sponge’s body is made up of thousands of cells, they exhibit a cellular grade of organization, due to the absence of sensory and nerve cells spongs do not possess a tissue level of organisation.

Question 2.
What is the tissue level of organisation among animals? Which metazoans exhibit this organisation?
Answer:
The tissue level of organisation is the lowest level of organisation among the eumetazoans, exhibited by diploblastic animals like cnidarians.

Question 3.
Animals exhibiting which level of organisation lead the relatively more efficient way of life when compared to those of the other levels of organisation? Why?
Answer:
Animals exhibit an organ-system level of organisation of the animals and are exhibited by the triploblastic animals.
Organ level of organisation is a further advancement over the tissue level in the evolution of levels of organisation.

Question 4.
What is monaxial heteropolar symmetry? Name the group of animals in which it is the principal symmetry.
Answer:
Monaxial heteropolar symmetry: When any plane passing through the central axis of the body divides an organism into two identical parts is called Monaxial heteropolar symmetry or radial symmetry. It is the principal symmetry of diploblastic animals such as Cnidarians and ctenophores.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 5.
Radial symmetry is an advantage to sessile or slow-moving organisms. Justify this statement.
Answer:
Animals showing radial symmetry live in water and they can respond equally to stimuli that arrive from all directions. Thus, radial symmetry is an advantage to sessile or slow-moving animals.

Question 6.
What is cephalization? How is it useful to its possessors?
Answer:
Cephalization: Concentration of nerve (Brain) and sensory cells at the anterior end of the body is called Cephalization. As a result of cephalization, these animals can sense the new environment and are more efficient than the other animals in seeking food, locating mates, and avoiding or escaping from predators.

Question 7.
Mention the animals that exhibited a ‘tube-within-a-tube’ organisation for the first time? Name their body cavity.
Answer:
Cnidarians and some flat warms are the first animals to exhibit a ‘tube-within-a-tube’ organisation. The body cavity is pseudocolor.

Question 8.
Why is the true coelom considered a secondary body cavity?
Answer:
During the embryonic development of the coelomates, the blastocoel is replaced by a true coelom derived from the mesoderm. So, the true coelom is also called ‘the secondary body cavity.

Question 9.
What are retroperitoneal organs?
Answer:
Certain organs such as the kidneys of the vertebrates are covered by the parietal peritoneum only on their ventral side. Such a peritoneum is called the ‘retroperitoneum’ and the organs lined by it are called ‘retroperitoneal organs.

Question 10.
If the mesentoblast cell is removed in the early embryonic development of protostomes what would be the fate of such animals?
Answer:
In the protostomes, the mesentoblast cell of the early embryo divides to form mesodermal blacks between the ectoderm and the endoderm and replaces the blastocoel. The split that appears in each mesodermal black leads to the formation of Schizocoelom. If the mesentoblast cell is removed in the early embryonic development of protostomes it will cause no ceolome in their animals.

Question 11.
What is enterocoelom? Name the enterocoelomate phyla in the animal kingdom.
Answer:
Animals in which the body cavity is formed from the mesodermal pouches of archenteron are called ‘enterocoelomates’.
Echinoderms, hemichordates, and chordates are enterocoelomates.

Question 12.
Stratified epithelial cells have a limited role in secretion. Justify their role in our skin.
Answer:
The main function of stratified epithelial cells is to provide protection against chemicals and mechanical stress. Hence the stratified epithelial cells have a limited role in secretion.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 13.
Distinguish between exocrine and endocrine glands with examples.
Answer:
Exocrine glands are provided with ducts. Secrete mucus, saliva, earwax, oil, milk, digestive enzymes, and other cell products.
Endocrine glands are ductless and their products are hormones that are not sent out via ducts but are carried to the target organs by blood.
Ex: Pituitary gland.

Question 14.
Distinguish between holocrine and apocrine glands.
Answer:
Apocrine glands in which the apical part of the gland cell in pinched off along with the secretory product.
Ex: Mammary glands
Holocrine glands, in which the entire cell disintegrates to discharge the contents.
Ex: Sebaceous glands

Question 15.
Mention any two substances secreted by mast cells and their functions.
Answer:
Mast cells secrete heparin – an anticoagulant, histamine, bradykinin – vasodilators, and serotonin – vasoconstrictor. Vasodilators cause inflammation in response to injury and infection.

Question 16.
Distinguish between a tendon and a ligament.
Answer:
Tendons are the collagen fibrous tissue of dense regular connective tissue which attaches the skeletal muscles to bones.
Ligaments are also the collagen fibers tissue of dense regular connective tissue which attach bones to other bones.

Question 17.
Distinguish between brown fat and white fat.
Answer:
White fat: It is the predominant type in adults, the adipocyte has a single large lipid droplet. White fat is metabolically not active.
Brown fat: It is found in fetuses and infants. Adipocyte of Brown fat has several small ‘lipid droplets’ and are metabolically active and generates heat to maintain body temperature required by infants.

Question 18.
What is the strongest cartilage? In which regions of the human body, do you find it?
Answer:
The fibrous cartilage is the strongest of all types of cartilage. It occurs in the intervertebral discs and pubic symphysis of the pelvis.

Question 19.
Distinguish between osteoblasts and osteoclasts.
Answer:
Osteoblasts are immature bone cells that secrete the organic components of the matrix and also play an important role in the mineralization of bone and become Osteocytes. Osteoclasts are phagocytic cells involved in the resorption of bone.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 20.
Define Osteon.
Answer:
In compact bone structure, a Haversian canal and the surrounding lamellae and lacunae are collectively called a Haversian system or Osteon.

Question 21.
What are Volkmann’s canals? What is their role?
Answer:
In compact bone structure, the Haversian canals communicate with one another, with the periosteum and also with the marrow cavity by transverse or oblique canals called Volkmann’s canals.

Question 22.
What is a Sesamoid bone? Give an example.
Answer:
Sesamoid bones are formed by ossification in tendons.
Eg: Patella (Knee cap) and Pisiform bone of the wrist of a mammal.

Question 23.
What is lymph? How does it differ from plasma?
Answer:
Lymph is a colourless fluid. It lacks RBC, platelets, and large plasma proteins, but has more number of leucocytes. It is chiefly composed of plasma and lymphocytes.

Question 24.
What is the hematocrit value?
Answer:
The percentage of the total volume occupied by RBCs in the blood is called the hematocrit value.

Question 25.
What are intercalated discs? What is their significance?
Answer:
The dark lines across cardiac muscle are called intercalated discs (IDS). These discs are highly characteristic of the cardie muscle.

Question 26.
“Cardiac muscle is highly resistant to fatigue”. Justify.
Answer:
The cardiac muscle is highly resistant to fatigue because it has numerous acrosomes, many molecules of myoglobin (Oxygen storing pigment), and a copious supply of blood which facilitate continuous aerobic respiration. The muscles are immune to fatigue and work tirelessly from the embryonic state until death.

Question 27.
Distinguish between ‘nucleus’ and ‘ganglion’ with respect to the nervous system.
Answer:
A group of cell bodies in the Central Nervous System is called a ‘nucleus’, and in the Peripheral Nervous System, it is called a ‘ganglion’.

Question 28.
Distinguish between tracts and nerves with respect to the nervous system.
Answer:
Groups of axons (nerve fibers) in the central nervous system (CNS) are called tracts’ and in the peripheral nervous system (PNS) they are called ‘nerves’.

Question 29.
Name the glial cells that form the myelin sheath around the axons of the central nervous system and peripheral nervous system respectively.
Answer:
In the central nervous system, the glial cells are called ‘Oligodendrocytes’, in the peripheral nervous system, the glial cells are called Schwann cells.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 30.
Distinguish between white matter and Greymatter of ‘CNS’.
Answer:
Myelinated nerve fibers occur in the white matter of the CNS, and in most peripheral nerves, and Non-myelinated axons are commonly found in the grey matter of the CNS and autonomous nervous system.

Question 31.
What are microglia and what is their origin add a note on their function.
Answer:
Microglial cells are the Neurogila (supporting cells) of cells of CNS which are phagocytic cells, of mesodermal origin.

Question 32.
What are pseudounipolar neurons? Where do you find them?
Answer:
In a unipolar neuron, the soma or cyton is found in the dorsal root ganglion they are called pseudounipolar neurons. These are found in spinal nerves.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the four different levels of organization in metazoans.
Answer:
The levels of organisation in metazoans are as follows:
1. Cellular level of organisation: It is the lowest level of organisaiton among the metazoans and ‘ is exhibited by the sponges. Different types of cells are functionally isolated due to the absence of sensory and nerve cells. There is no uniformity of labor among the cells and they don’t form tissues.

2. Tissue level of organisation: This is the lowest level of organisation among the eumetazoans, exhibited by diploblastic animals like the cnidarians. In these animals, the cells which perform the same function are arranged into tissues due to the presence of nerve cells and sensory cells.

3. Organ level of organisation: An aggregation of different kinds of tissues that are specialized for a particular function is called an organ. Organ level of organisation is a further advancement over the tissue level in the evolution of levels of organisation. It is the first time appeared in the members of platyhelminths.

4. Organ-system level: It is the highest level of organisation among the animals and is exhibited by triploblastic animals such as the flatworms, nematodes, annelids, arthropods, molluscs, echinodermates, and chordates. High specilized sensory and nerve cells bring about a higher level of coordination and integration among the various organ systems to lead an efficient way of life.

Question 2.
In which group of bilaterians do you find solid bauplan? Why is it called so?
Answer:
The bilaterian’s body plan is the solid bauplan when only one plane that passes through the identical axis divides an organism into two identical parts, it is called bilateral symmetry. It is the principal type of symmetry in triploblastic animals.

Bilaterally symmetrical animals are more efficient than the other animals in seeking food locating mates and in avoiding or escaping from predators, because of cephalization. As a result of cephalization, bilaterally symmetrical animals can sense the new environment into which they enter and respond more efficiently and quickly.

Question 3.
Mention the advantages of coelom over pseudocolor.
Answer:
Advantages of coelom over pseudocoelom:
1. Visceral organs of eucoelomates are muscular (because of their association with mesoderm) and so they can contract and relax freely independent of the muscular movements of the body wall in the coelomic space, e.g.: peristaltic movements of the alimentary canal.
2. Gametes are released into the coelom in some invertebrates (which do not have glnoducts) and in the female vertebrates.
3. Coelomic fluid receives excretory products and stores them temporarily before their elimination.
4. In the eucoelomates, the mesoderm comes into contact with the endoderm of the alimentary canal, and it causes ‘regional specialization of the gut, such as the development of gizzard, stomach, etc., This is referred to as ‘primary induction’. In the case of the pseudocoelomates, due to the absence of such a contract between the gut and the mesoderm, the wall of the gut does not show complex and highly specialized organs.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 4.
Describe the formation of schizocoelom and enterocoelom.
Answer:
Schizocoelom: During embryonic development, a specialized cell called 4d blastomere is formed. The cells formed from these cells divide and redivide and develop blocks of mesoderm in blastocoel. The blocks fuse and form the mesodermal band which later on splits to form the Schizocoelom. This type of coelom is present in Annelida, Arthropoda, and Mollusca.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q4

Enterocoelomates: Animals in which the body cavity is formed from the mesodermal pouches of archenteron are called enterocoelomates. Echinoderms, hemichordates, and chordates are enterocoelomates. In these animals, mesodermal ouches that evaginate from the wall of the archenteron into the blastocoel are fused with one another to form the enterocoelom. All the enterocoelomates are deuterostomes and they show radial and indeterminate cleavage.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q4.1

Question 5.
Describe briefly the three types of intercellular junctions of epithelial tissues.
Answer:
The specialized ‘junctions’ provide both structural and functional links between the individual cells of an epithelium. They show different types of junctions so as to serve the specific needs of that tissue. They are
(A) Tight junctions: These junctions between epithelial cells prevent ‘leakages’ of body fluids. For example, they prevent leakages of water into the surrounding cells in our sweat glands. The plasma membranes of adjacent cells are tightly pressed against each other and are bound together by specific proteins.

(B) Desmosomes: Muscle cells are provided with “desmosomes” (anchoring junctions) which act as ‘rivets’ binding the cells together into strong sheets. Intermediate filaments made of protein ‘keratin’ anchor desmosomes in the cytoplasm.

(C) Gap junctions: They provide continuous cytoplasmic channels between adjacent cells. Various types of ions, sugar molecules amino acids, etc. can pass from a cell to an adjacent cell through ‘gap junctions. They occur in many types of tissues including the ‘cardiac muscles’ where they allow rapid conduction of impulses or depolarization.

Question 6.
Give an account of glandular epithelium.
Answer:
Glandular epithelium: Some of the columnar or cuboidal cells that get specialised for the production of certain secretions, form glandular epithelium. The glands are of two types.
Unicellular glands: Consisting of isolated glandular cells such as goblet cells of the gut.
Multicellular glands: Consisting of clusters of cells such as salivary glands. On the basis of the mode of pouring of their secretions, glands are divided into two types namely exocrine and endocrine glands.
Exocrine glands: These glands provided with ducts secrete mucus, saliva, earwax, oil, milk, digestive enzymes, etc.
Endocrine glands: These glands are ductless and their products are hormones, which are carried to the target organs by blood.
Based on the mode of secretion, Exocrine glands are further divided into three types.
1. Merocrine glands: Which release the secretory granules without the loss of other cellular material.
Ex: Pancreas
2. Apocrineglands: The apical part of the cell is pinched off along with the secretory product.
Ex: Mammary glands
3. Holocrine glands: The entire cell disintegrates to discharge the contents.
Ex: Sebaceous gland

Question 7.
Give a brief account of the cells of areolar tissue.
Answer:
Areolar tissue: It is one of the most widely distributed connective tissue in the body. It forms the packing tissue in almost all organs. Areolar tissue forms the subcutaneous layer of the skin. It has cells and fibres. Cells of the areolar tissue are fibroblasts, mast cells, macrophages, adipocytes, and plasma cells.
1. Fibroblasts are the most common cells which secrete fibres. The inactive cells are called fibrocytes.
2. Mast cells secrete heparin (an anticoagulant), histamine, bradykinin (vasodilators), and serotonin vasoconstrictor). Vasodilators cause inflammation in response to injury and infection.
3. Macrophages are amoeboid cells, Phagocytic in function, and act as internal scavengers. They are derived from the monocytes of blood. Tissue-fixed macrophages’ are called histiocytes and others are ‘wandering macrophages’.
4. Plasma cells are derived from the B-lymphocytes and produce antibodies.
5. Adipocytes are specialized cells for the storage of fats.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q7

Question 8.
Describe the three types of cartilage.
Answer:
Cartilage is a solid, but semi-rigid (flexible) connective tissue. Cartilage is of three types, which differ from each other chiefly in the composition of the matrix.

Cartilage is a solid, but semi-rigid (flexible) connective tissue It resists compression. Matrix is firm but somewhat pliable. It has collagen fibres, elastic fibres (only in the elastic cartilage), and matrix-secreting cells called chondroblasts. These cells are enclosed in fluid-filled spaces called lacunae. Chocolates are the inactive cells of cartilage. Cartilage is surrounded by a fibrous connective tissue sheath called perichondrium. Cartilage is of three types, which differ from each other chiefly in the composition of the matrix.

1. Hyaline cartilage: It is bluish-white, translucent, and glass-like cartilage. Matrix is homogeneous and shows delicate collagen fibres. It is the weakest and the most common type of cartilage. It is found in the walls of the nose, larynx, trachea, and bronchi.

2. Elastic cartilage: It is yellowish due to elastic fibres. Matrix has an abundance of yellow elastic fibres in addition to collagen fibres. It provides strength and elasticity. Perichondrium is present. It is found in the pinnae of the external ears, Eustachian tubes, and epiglottis.

3. Fibrous cartilage: Matrix has bundles of collagen fibres. The perichondrium is absent. It is the strongest of all types of cartilage. It occurs in the Intervertebral discs and pubic symphysis of the pelvis.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q8

Question 9.
Explain the Haversian system.
Answer:
The compact bone consists of several structural units called Osteons or Haversian systems arranged around and parallel to the bone marrow cavities.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q9
The Haversian system consists of a Haversian canal that runs parallel to the marrow cavity. It contains an artery, a vein, and a lymphatic vessel. The Haversian canal is surrounded by concentric lamellae. Small fluid-filled spaces called ‘lacunae’ provided with minute canaliculi lie in between the lamellae. Canaliculi connect the lacunae with one another and with the Haversian canal.

Each lacuna encloses one osteocyte (an inactive form of osteoblast). The cytoplasmic processes of osteocytes extend through canaliculi. A Haversian canal and the surrounding lamellae and lacunae are collectively called a Haversian system or osteon. The Haversian canals communicate with one another, with the perio¬steum and also with the marrow cavity by transverse or oblique canals called Volkmann’s canals. Nutrients and gases diffuse from the vascular supply of Haversian canals.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 10.
Write short notes on lymph.
Answer:
Lymph: Lymph is a colourless fluid. It lacks RBC, platelets, and large plasma proteins, but has more number of leucocytes. It is chiefly composed of plasma and lymphocytes. When compared to the tissue fluid, it contains very small amounts of nutrients and oxygen but has abundant CO2 and other metabolites.

The most important site of the formation of lymph is the interstitial space. As blood passes through the blood capillaries, some portion of blood that includes water, solutes, and proteins of low molecular weight passer: through the walls of capillaries, into the interstitial spaces due to hydrostatic pressure at the arteriolar ends. This fluid forms the interstitial fluid (tissue fluid). Most of the interstitial fluid is returned directly to the capillaries due to osmotic pressure at the venular ends.

A little amount of this tissue fluid passes through a system of lymphatic capillaries (lymph capillaries of the intestinal villi are called ‘lacteals’), vessels, and ducts and finally, reaches the blood through the subclavian veins. The extracellular ’tissue fluid’ that passes into the lymph capillaries and lymph vessels is called ‘lymph’. The lymphatic system represents an ‘accessory route’ by which interstitial fluid flows from tissue spaces into blood.

Question 11.
Describe the structure of a skeletal muscle.
Answer:
Skeletal (striped and voluntary) muscle:
It is usually attached to skeletal structures by ‘tendons’. In a typical muscle such as the ‘biceps’ muscle, skeletal muscle fibre is surrounded by a thin connective tissue sheath, the endomysium. A bundle of muscle fibres is called a fascicle. It is surrounded by a connective tissue sheath called perimysium. A group of fascicles forms a ‘muscle’ which is surrounded by an epimysium (outermost connective tissue sheath). These connective tissue layers may extend beyond the muscle to form a chord-like tendon or sheet-like aponeurosis.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q11
A skeletal muscle fibre is a long, cylindrical, and unbranched cell. It is a multinucleated cell with many oval nuclei characteristically in the ‘peripheral’ cytoplasm (a syncytium formed by the fusion of cells). Sarcoplasm has many myofibrils which show alternate dark and light bands. So it is called striped or striated muscle.

Question 12.
Describe the structure of a cardiac muscle.
Answer:
Cardiac (striped and involuntary) muscle: The cardiac muscle is striated like the skeletal muscle (shows sarcomeres). Cardiac muscle is found in the ‘myocardium’ of the heart of vertebrates. The cardiac muscle cells or the myocardial cells’ are short, cylindrical, mononucleate, or binucleate cells whose ends branch and form junctions with other cardiac muscle cells. Each myocardial cell is joined to adjacent myocardial cells by ‘electrical synapses’ or ‘gap junctions. They permit ‘electrical impulses to be conducted along the long axis of the cardiac muscle fibre. The dark lines across cardiac muscle are called intercalated discs (IDs). These discs are highly characteristic of the cardiac muscle.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q12

Question 13.
Give an account of the supporting cells of nervous tissue.
Answer:
Nervous tissue is of two types.
1. Nervous
2. Supporting cell or neuroglia

Neuroglia (supporting cells): These are the supporting and non-conducting cells that provide a microenvironment suitable for neuronal activity. Unlike neurons, they continue to divide throughout life. Neuroglial cells of the CNS include oligodendrocytes (that form myelin sheath as mentioned above); astrocytes (star-shaped cells) that form an interconnected network and bind neurons and capillaries (helping in providing the blood-brain barrier); ependymal cells, which are ciliated cells that line the cavities of the brain and spinal cord to bring movements in the cerebrospinal fluid; microglial cells, which are phagocytic cells, of mesodermal origin. Neuroglial cells of the peripheral nervous system include the satellite cells and Schwann cells. Satellite cells surround the cell bodies in ganglia, and Schwann cells form neurolemma around axons.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 14.
Describe the structure of a multipolar neuron.
Answer:
Multipolar neurons have one axon and two or more dendrites. Most neurons in our body are multipolar neurons.
A neuron usually consists of a cell body with one too many dendrites and a single axon.

Neurons: Neurons are the ‘functional units of nervous tissue. These are electrically excitable cells that receive, initiate, and conduct/transmit impulses. When a neuron is stimulated, an electric disturbance (action potential) is generated which swiftly travels along its plasma membrane. A neuron usually consists of a “cell body” with one to many dendrites and a single axon.

Cell body: It is also called perikaryon, cyton, or soma. It contains abundant granular cytoplasm and a large spherical nucleus. The cytoplasm has Nissl bodies (they represent RER, the sites of protein synthesis), neurofibrils, and lipofuscin granules.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q14
Dendrites: Several short, branched processes that arise from the cyton are called dendrites. They also contain Nissl bodies and neurofibrils. They conduct nerve impulses towards the cell body (afferent processes).

Axon: An axon is a single, long, cylindrical process that originates from a region of the cyton called the axon hillock. The Plasmalemma of an axon is called axolemma, and the cytoplasm is called axoplasm, which contains neurofibrils. However, Nissl bodies are absent. An axon may give rise to collateral branches. Distally it branches into many fine filaments called telodendrites, (axon terminals), which end in bulb-like structures called synaptic knobs or terminal boutons. Synaptic knobs possess ‘synaptic vesicles’ containing chemicals called neurotransmitters.

Question 15.
Write short notes on (a) Platelets and (a) Synapse.
Answer:
(a) Blood platelets (Thrombocytes): These are colourless non- nucleated, round or oval biconvex discs. The number of platelets per cubic mm of blood is about 2,50,000-4,50,000. They are formed from giant megakaryocytes produced in the red bone marrow by fragmentation. The average lifespan of blood platelets is about 5 to 9 days. They secrete thromboplastin and play an important role in blood clotting. They adhere to the damaged endothelial lining of capillaries and seal minor vascular openings.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q15
(b) Synapse: It is the place in between the two neurons or inter-neuronal or neuromuscular junctions. Nerve cells do not have direct contact with each other. There is a microscopic gap of about 200-300 A° present between the nerve cells called a synapse. The nerve cell present before synapse is called the presynaptic neuron and the behind is called the post-synaptic neuron. A neurotransmitter substance called acetylcholine is secreted in the synapse by presynaptic neurons’ telodendrites. Acetylcholine helps in the conduction of nerve impulses from one neuron to another neuron.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is coelom? Explain the different types of coelom with suitable examples and neat labelled diagrams.
Answer:
The body cavity, which is lined by mesoderm, is called coelom more elaborately, coelom is a fluid-filled space between the body wall and visceral organs and lined by mesodermal epithelium peritoneum. Based on the body cavity triploblastic animals can be classified into acoelomentes, pseudo-coelo mates, and coelomates.

Acoelomate bilaterians: The bilaterian animals in which the body cavity is absent are called acoelomates, e.g. Platy-helminthes (lowest bilaterians). In these animals, the mesenchyme derived from the thrid germinal layer, called mesoderm, occupies the entire blasto coel, between the ectoderm and the endoderm, so that the adults have neither the primary cavity (blasto-coelom) nor the secondary cavity (coelom). As there is no body cavity, the acoelomates exhibit a solid body plan.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q1

Pseudocoelomate bilaterians: In some animals, the body cavity is not lined by mesodermal epithelia. Such animals are called Pseudocoelomates. They include the members of phylum Aschelminthes (Nematoda, Rotifera, and some minor phyla). During embryonic development mesoderm (mesenchyme) occupies only a part of the blastocoel adjoining the ectoderm. The unoccupied portion of the blastocoel persists as pseudocoelom.

Eucoelomate bilaterians: Coelom or ‘true coelom’ is a fluid-filled cavity, that lies between the body wall and the visceral organs and is lined by mesodermal epithelium, the peritoneum. The portion of the peritoneum that underlines the body wall is the parietal peritoneum or somatic peritoneum. The portion of the peritoneum that covers the visceral organs is the splanchnic peritoneum or visceral peritoneum. In coelomates, the visceral organs are suspended in the coelom by the peritoneum.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q1.1
During the embryonic development of the eucoelomates, the blastocoel is replaced by the true coelom derived from the mesoderm. So, the true coelom is also called the ‘secondary body cavity. Based on the mode of formation of coelom, the eucoelomates are classified into two types:

I. Schizocoelomates: Animals in which the body cavity is formed by the ‘splitting of mesoderm’ are called schizocoelomates. Annelids, arthropods, and mollusks are schizocoelomates in the animal kingdom. All the schizocoelomates are protostomians and they show ‘holoblastic’, ‘spiral’, and ‘determinate’ cleavage. The 4d blastomere or mesentoblast cell of the early embryo divides to form mesodermal blocks between the ectoderm and the endoderm and replaces the blastocoel. The split that appears in each mesodermal block leads to the formation of Schizocoelom.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q1.2

II. Enterocoelomates: Animals in which the body cavity is formed from the mesodermal pouches of archenteron are called enterocoelomates. Echinoderms, hemichordates, and chordates are the enterocoelomates. In these animals, mesodermal pouches that evaginate from the wall of the archenteron into the blastocoel are fused with one another to form the enterocoelom. All the enterocoelomates are deuterostomes and they show radial and indeterminate cleavage.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q1.3

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 2.
What is symmetry? Describe the different types of symmetry in the animal kingdom with suitable examples.
Answer:
Symmetry: The concept of symmetry is fundamental in understanding the organisation of an animal. Symmetry in animals is the balanced distribution of paired body parts. The body plan of a vast majority of metazoans exhibits some kind of symmetry. However, most of the sponges and snails show asymmetry (lack of symmetry). The symmetry of an animal and its mode of life are correlated.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2
Asymmetry: The animals, which cannot be cut into two equal parts (antimeres) in any plane passing through the centre of the body is called asymmetrical, e.g.: most sponges and adult gastropods. In asymmetrical animals, the body lacks a definite form.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2.1
Symmetry: The regular arrangement of body parts in a geometrical design relative to the axis of the body is called symmetry. In a symmetrical animal, paired body parts are arranged on either side of the plane passing through the principal axis, such that they are equidistant from the plane. The unpaired body parts are located mostly on the plane, passing through the principal axis.
Basically, the symmetry in animals is of two kinds:
(i) Radial symmetry
(ii) Bilateral symmetry

(i) Radial Symmetry or Monaxial heteropolar Symmetry: When any plane passing through the central axis (oro-aboral axis/principal axis) of the body divides an organism into two identical parts, it is called radial symmetry. The animals with radial symmetry are either sessile or planktonic or sluggish forms. It is the principal symmetry of the diploblastic animals such as the cnidarians and ctenophores symmetrical (as it is five-angled, it is also called pentamerous radial symmetry). Radially symmetrical animals have many planes of symmetry, whereas pentamerous radially symmetrical animals have five planes of symmetry.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2.2

(ii) Bilateral symmetry: When only one plane (median sagittal plane) that passes through the central axis (anterior-posterior axis) divides an organism into two identical parts, it is called bilateral symmetry. It is the ‘principal type of symmetry’ in triploblastic animals. Among the triploblastic animals, some gastropods become secondarily asymmetrical though they have primarily bilaterally symmetrical larvae.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2.3
Bilaterally symmetrical animals are more efficient than other animals in seeking food, locating mates, and in avoiding or escaping from predators, because of cephalization (concentration of nerve and sensory cells at the anterior end). As a result of cephalization, bilaterally symmetrical animals can sense the new environment into which they enter and respond more efficiently and quickly.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2.4

Question 3.
Classify and describe the epithelial tissues on the basis of structural modification of cells with examples.
Answer:
Epithelium (epi-upon; thelia – growing) forms the outer covering of the body and the living of internal organs and cavities. There are two types of epithelial tissues namely ‘simple epithelia1 and ‘compound epithelia’ based on the number of layers or strata.

Simple epithelium is composed of a single layer of cells and forms the lining of body cavities, ducts, and vessels. It helps in the diffusion, absorption, filtration, and secretion of substances. On the basis of the shape of the cells, it is further divided into three types:
(i) Simple squamous epithelium (Pavement epithelium): It is composed of a single layer of flat and tile-like cells, each with a centrally located ‘ovoid nucleus’. It is found in the endothelium of blood vessels, mesothelium of body cavities (pleura, peritoneum, and pericardium), wall of Bowman’s capsule of the nephron, lining of alveoli of lungs, etc.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3

(ii) Simple cuboidal epithelium: It is composed of a single layer of cube-like cells with centrally located spherical nuclei. It is found in germinal epi – thelium, proximal, and distal convoluted tubules of the nephron. Cuboidal epithelium of proximal convoluted tubule of nephron has ‘microvilli’.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.1

(iii) Simple columnar epithelium: It is composed of a single layer of tall and slender cells with oval nuclei located near the base. It has mucus-secreting ‘goblet cells’ in some places. It is of two types:
(a) Ciliated columnar epithelium: Columnar epithelial cells have cilia on their free surface. It is mainly present in the inner surface of hollow organs like fallopian tubes, ventricles of the brain, the central canal of the spinal cord, bronchioles, etc.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.2

(b) Non-ciliated columnar epithelium: Columnar cells are without cilia. It is found in the lining of the stomach and intestine. Microvilli are present in the columnar epithelium of the intestine to increase the surface area of absorption.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.3

(II) Compound epithelium (stratified epithelium): It is made up of more than one layer of cells. Its main function is to provide protection against chemical and mechanical stress. It covers the dry surface of the skin as stratified, keratinized, squamous epithelium. It covers the moist surface of the buccal cavity, pharynx, esophagus, and vagina as stratified non-keratinized squamous epithelium. It forms the inner lining of the larger ducts of salivary glands, sweat glands, and pancreatic ducts as stratified cuboidal epithelium. It forms the wall of the urinary bladder as transitional epithelium.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.4

(III) Glandular epithelium: Some of the columnar or cuboidal cells that get specialised for the production of certain secretions, form glandular epithelium. The glands are of two types – unicellular glands consisting of isolated glandular cells such as goblet cells of the gut, and multicellular glands, consisting of clusters of cells such as salivary glands. On the basis of the mode of pouring of their secretions, glands are divided into two types namely exocrine and endocrine glands. Exocrine glands are provided with ducts; that secrete mucus, saliva, earwax (cerumen), oil, milk, digestive enzymes, and other cell products. In contrast, endocrine glands are ductless and their products are ‘hormones’, which are not sent out via ducts, but are carried to the target organs by blood.

Based on the mode of secretion, exocrine glands are further divided into
(i) merocrine glands (e.g.: pancreas) which release the secretory granules without the loss of other cellular material.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.5
(ii) Apocrine glands (e.g.: mammary glands) in which the apical part of the cell is pinched off along with the secretory product and
(iii) Holocrine glands (e.g.: sebaceous glands), in which the entire cell disintegrates to discharge the contents.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 4.
Describe the various types of connective tissue properly with suitable examples.
Answer:
Connective tissue proper is of two types as
(A) Loose connective tissue proper
(B) Dense connective tissue proper

(A) Loose connective tissue: Cells and fibres are loosely arranged in a semi-fluid ground substance there are three types of loose connective tissues-areolar tissue adipose tissue and reticular tissue.
(i) Areolar tissue: It is one of the most widely distributed connective tissues in the body. It forms the packing tissue in almost all organs. Areolar tissue forms the subcutaneous layer of the skin. It has cells and fibres. Cells of the areolar tissue are the fibroblasts, mast cells, macrophages, adipocytes, and plasma cells.
1. Fibroblasts are the most common cells with secreted fibres. The inactive cells are called
fibrocytes.
2. Mast cells secrete heparin (an anticoagulant), histamine, bradykinin (vasodilators), and serotonin (vasoconstrictor), vasodilators cause inflammation in response to injury and infection.
3. Macrophages are amoeboid cells, phagocytic in function, and act as internal scavengers. They are derived from the monocytes of blood. ‘Tissue fixed macrophages’ are called histiocytes and others are ‘wandering macrophages’.
4. Plasma cells are derived from the B-lymphocytes and produce antibodies.
5. Adipocytes are specialized cells for the storage of fats.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q4

(ii) Adipose tissue: It is specialized for fat storage. It consists of a large number of adipocytes and few fibres. The adipose tissue which is found beneath the skin provides. Adipose tissue is of two types: white adipose tissue, and brown adipose tissue. Excess nutrients which are not used immediately are converted into fats and stored in this tissue.
White adipose tissue (WAT): It is the predominant type in adults, and the adipocyte has a single large lipid droplet (monocular). White fat is metabolically not active.
Brown adipose tissue (BAT): It is found in fetuses and infants. Adipocyte of BAT has several small ‘lipid droplets’ (multilocular) and numerous mitochondria. Brown fat is metabolically active and generates ‘heat’ to maintain the body temperature required by infants.

(iii) Reticular tissue: It has specialized fibroblasts called reticular cells. They secrete ‘reticular fibers’ that form an interconnecting network. It forms the ‘supporting framework’ of lymphoid organs such as bone marrow, spleen, and lymph nodes and forms the reticular lamina of the ‘basement membrane’.

(B) Dense connective tissue: This tissue consists of more fibres, but fewer cells. It has very little ground substance. Based on the arrangement of fibres, the dense connective tissue is of three types.
(i) Dense regular connective tissue: In this tissue, collagen fibres are arranged parallel to one another in bundles. Tendons that attach the skeletal muscles to bones and ligaments which attach bones to other bones are examples of this type of connective tissue.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q4.1

(ii) Dense irregular connective tissue: In this type of connective tissue, bundles of collagen fibres are irregularly arranged. Periosteum, endosteum, pericardium, heart valves, joint capsule, and deeper region of the dermis of skin contain/are made up of this type of connective tissue.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q4.2

(iii) Elastic connective tissue: It is mainly made of yellow elastic fibres, capable of considerable extension and recoil. This tissue can recoil to its original shape, when the forces of stretch are released. It occurs in the wall of arteries, vocal cords, trachea, bronchi, and ‘elastic ligaments’ present between vertebrae.

In addition to the above-mentioned connective tissues, mucous connective tissue occurs as foetal or embryonic connective tissue. It is present in the umbilical cord as Wharton’s jelly.

Question 5.
What is skeletal tissue? Describe the various types of skeletal tissue.
Answer:
Skeletal tissue (supporting tissue): It forms the endoskeleton of the vertebrates. It supports the body, protects various organs, provides a surface for the attachment of muscles, and helps in locomotion. It is of two types:
(A) Cartilage (Gristle): Cartilage is a solid, but semi-rigid (flexible) connective tissue. It resists compression. Matrix is firm but somewhat pliable. It has collagen fibres, elastic fibres (only in the elastic cartilage), and matrix-secreting cells called chondroblasts. These cells are enclosed in fluid-filled spaces called lacunae. Chondrocytes are the inactive cells of cartilage. Cartilage is surrounded by a fibrous connective tissue sheath called perichondrium.

Cartilage is of three types, which differ from each other chiefly in the composition of the matrix.
1. Hyaline cartilage: It is bluish-white, translucent, and glass-like cartilage. Matrix is homogeneous and shows delicate collagen fibres. It is the weakest and the most common type of cartilage. It is found in the walls of the nose, Larynx, trachea, and bronchi.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q5

2. Elastic cartilage: It is yellowish due to elastic fibres. Matrix has an abundance of yellow elastic fibres in addition to collagen fibres. It provides strength and elasticity. Perichondrium is present. It is found in the pinnae of the external ears, Eustachian tubes, and epiglottis.

3. Fibrous cartilage: Matrix has bundles of collagen fibres. The perichondrium is absent. It is the strongest of all types of cartilage. It occurs in the intervertebral discs and pubic symphysis of the pelvis.

(B) Bone (osseous) tissue: Bone is highly calcified (mineralized), solid, hard and rigid connective tissue. It is the major component of the endoskeleton of most adult vertebrates.

Bone has an outer fibrous connective tissue sheath called periosteum, the inner connective tissue sheath that lines the marrow cavity called the endosteum, a non-living extracellular matrix, living cells, and bone marrow. Bone cells include osteoblasts, osteocytes, and osteoclasts. Osteoblasts (immature bone cells) secrete the organic components (collagen fibres) of the matrix and also play an important role in the ‘mineralization of bone’ and become osteocytes (mature bone cells). Osteocytes are enclosed in fluid-filled lacunae. Osteoclasts are phagocytic cells involved in the resorption of bone.

Types of bones based on the method of formation:
(i) Cartilage bones (replacing bones or endochondral bones) are formed by ossification within the cartilage e.g. bones of limbs, girdles, and vertebrae.
(ii) Investing bones (membrane bones or dermal bones) are formed by the ossification in the embryonic mesenchyme e.g. most of the bones of the cranium.
(iii) Sesamoid bones are formed by ossification in tendons e.g.: patella (knee cap) and pisiform bone of the wrist of a mammal
(iv) are formed by ossification in the soft tissues, e.g.: Oscordis (inside the heart of ruminants), and Ospenis (inside the glans-penis of many mammals such as rodents, bats, and carnivores).

Types of bones based on the structure:
1. Spongy bone (Cancellous bone or trabecular bone): It occurs in the epiphyses and metaphyses
of long bones. It looks spongy and contains columns of bone called ‘trabeculae’ with irregular interspaces filled with red bone marrow.
2. Compact bone: The diaphysis of a long bone is made up of ‘compact bone. It has a dense continuous lamellar matrix between the periosteum and endosteum.

Structure of a compact bone: Diaphysis (shaft) is a part of a long bone that lies in between expanded ends. The diaphysis is covered by a dense connective fibrous tissue called the periosteum. The diaphysis of a long bone has a hollow cavity called marrow cavity which is lined or surrounded by the endosteum. In between periosteum and endosteum, the matrix of the bone is laid down in the form of ‘lamellae’. Outer circumferential lamellae are located immediately beneath the periosteum; inner circumferential lamellae are located around the endosteum.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q5.1
Between the outer and inner circumferential lamellae, there are many Haversian systems (osteons – units of bone). The spaces between the Haversian systems are filled with interstitial lamellae. Haversian system consists of a Haversian canal that runs parallel to the marrow cavity. It contains an artery, a vein and a lymphatic vessel. Haversian canal is surrounded by concentric lamellae. Small fluid filled spaces called ‘lacunae’ provided with minute canaliculi lie in between the lamellae.

Canaliculi connect the lacunae with one another and with Haversian canal. Each lacuna encloses one osteocyte (inactive form of osteoblast). The cytoplasmic processes of osteocytes extend through canaliculi. A Haversian canal and the surrounding lamellae and lacunae are collectively called a Haversian system or osteon. The Haversian canals communicate with one another, with the periosteum and also with the marrow cavity by transverse or oblique canals called Volkmanns canals. Nutrients and gases diffuse from the vascular supply of Haversian canals.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 6.
Give an account of the “formed elements” of Blood.
Answer:
Blood is a red-coloured, opaque, and slightly alkaline fluid. It is composed of blood plasma and formed elements or blood cells – the RBC, WBC, and platelets.
Formed elements of Blood cells: The blood corpuscles (RBC and WBC) constitute 45% of the total blood by volume.

(i) Red blood corpuscles (Erythrocytes): Erythrocytes of mammals are circular (elliptical in camels and Liamas), biconcave and enucleate. The biconcave shape provides a large surface area-to-volume ratio, thus providing more area for the exchange of gases. These are 7.8 pm in diameter. The number of RBCs per cubic millimeter of blood is about 5 million in a man and 4.5 million in a woman.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6

(ii) White blood corpuscles (Leucocytes): These are nucleate, colourless, complete cells. They are spherical or irregular in shape and are capable of exhibiting amoeboid movement into the extravascular areas by diapedesis. WBC are two main types: 1) Granulocytes and 2) Agranulocytes.

Granulocytes: They possess cytoplasmic granules that may take three different types of stains, neutral or acidic, or basic. The nucleus of the granulocytes is divided into lobes and assumes different shapes, hence, these are also called polymorphonuclear leucocytes. Based on the staining properties these are of three tvoes.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6.1

Basophils: They constitute about 0.4% of the total leucocytes. The nucleus is divided into irregular lobes. Cytoplasmic granules are ‘fewer’ and ‘irregular’ in shape. They take basic stains. They produce heparin, histamine, etc. They supplement the function of mast cells when needed.

Eosinophils (acidophils): They constitute about 2.3% of the total leucocytes. The nucleus is distinctly bilobed. The cytoplasm has large granules which stain with acidic dyes such as ‘eosin’.

Neutrophils: They constitute about 62% of the total leucocytes. The nucleus is many lobed (2-5). Specific cytoplasmic granules are small and abundant. They stain with ‘neutral dyes’.

Agranulocytes: Cytoplasmic granules are absent in agranulocytes. divided into lobes. These are of two types:
(a) Lymphocytes: They constitute about 30% of the total leucocytes. They are small, spherical cells with large spherical nuclei and scanty peripheral cytoplasm. There are functionally two types of lymphocytes – ‘B’ lymphocytes, which produce ‘antibodies’ and T lymphocytes which play a key role in the immunological reactions of the body. Some lymphocytes live only a few days while others survive for many years.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6.2

(b) Monocytes: They constitute about 5.3% of the leucocytes. The nucleus is kidney-shaped (reniform). These are the largest, motile phagocytes. They engulf bacteria and cellular debris. They differentiate into macrophages when they enter the connective tissues.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6.3

(iii) Blood platelets (Thrombocytes): These are colourless non-nucleated, round, or oval biconvex discs. The number of platelets per cubic mm of blood is about 2,50,000-4,50,000. They are formed from giant megakaryocytes produced in the red bone marrow by fragmentation. The average lifespan of blood platelets is about 5 to 9 days. They secrete thromboplastin and play an important role in blood clotting. They adhere to the damaged endothelial lining of capillaries and seal minor vascular openings.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6.4

Question 7.
Compare and contrast the three types of muscular tissues.
Answer:
Muscular tissue is mesodermal in origin. Muscles show three essential properties such as excitability, conductivity, and contractility. The study of muscular tissues is known as mycology. Muscular tissue has elongated cells called ‘muscle fibers’ (myocytes) which are surrounded by a connective tissue sheath. The extracellular matrix is absent. The plasma membrane of a muscle fiber is called sarcolemma.

The cytoplasm of a muscle fibre is called Sarco plasm, the endoplasmic reticulum, the sarcoplasmic reticulum, and the mitochondria, the Sarcosomes. The cytoplasm of a muscle fibre has several myofibrils. Each myofibril has thick (myosin) and thin (actin) myofilaments. The regular arrangement of myosin and actin filaments is responsible for the alternate dark and light bands of a ‘striated muscle’. Sarcoplasm also contains ATP, phosphocreatine, glycogen, and myoglobin. Muscles are of three types – skeletal, smooth, and cardiac.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q7

Skeletal (striped and voluntary) muscle: It is usually attached to skeletal structures by ‘tendons’. A typical muscle such as the ‘biceps’ muscle/skeletal muscle fibre is surrounded by a thin connective tissue sheath, the endomysium. A bundle of muscle fibres is called a fascicle.

It is surrounded by a connective tissue sheath called perimysium. A group of fascicles forms a ‘muscle’ that is surrounded by an epimysium (outermost connective tissue sheath). These connective tissue layers may extend beyond the muscle to form a chord-like tendon or sheet¬like aponeurosis.

A skeletal muscle fibre is a long, cylindrical, and unbranched cell. It is a multinucleated cell with many oval nuclei characteristically in the “peripheral” cytoplasm (a syncytium formed by the fusion of cells). Sarcoplasm has many myofibrils which show alternate dark and light bands. So it is called striped or striated muscle.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q7.1

Smooth (unstriped and involuntary muscle): It is located in the walls of the visceral organs such as blood vessels, trachea, bronchi, stomach, intestine, excretory and genital ducts, and so this is also called ‘visceral muscle’. As cross striations are absent, it is called ‘smooth muscle. It is also found in the iris and ciliary body of the eye and in the skin as ‘arrector pili muscles that are attached to hair follicles.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q7.2
Usually, smooth muscles are arranged in ‘layers’/’sheets’. A smooth muscle fibre is a spindle-shaped (fusiform), uninucleate cell. Myofibrils do not show alternate dark and light bands due to the irregular arrangement of actin and myosin fibres. They do not work under conscious control, and so they are called involuntary muscles. Smooth muscles exhibit ‘slow’ and ‘prolonged’ contractions. They may remain contracted for long periods without fatigue (show sustained involuntary contractions called ‘spasms’). The contraction of smooth muscles is under the control of the autonomous nervous system.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Cardiac (striped and involuntary) muscle: The cardiac muscle is striated like the skeletal muscle (shows sarcomeres). Cardiac muscle is found in the ‘myocardium’ of the heart of vertebrates. The cardiac muscle cells or the ‘myocardial cells’ are short, cylindrical, mononucleate, or binucleate cells whose ends branch and form junctions with other cardiac muscle cells. Each myocardial cell is joined to adjacent myocardial cells by ‘electrical synapses’ or gap junctions. They permit ‘electrical impulses’ to be conducted along the long axis of the cardiac muscle fibre. The dark lines across cardiac muscle are called intercalated discs (IDs). These discs are highly characteristic of the cardiac muscle.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q7.3

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 2 Biological Classification

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 2nd Lesson Biological Classification Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 2nd Lesson Biological Classification

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the nature of cell-walls in diatoms?
Answer:
In Diatoms, the cell wall is made up of silica and thus the walls are Indestructible.

Question 2.
How are Viroids different from viruses? [Mar. 14]
Answer:

ViroidsViruses
1. Infectious agents which contains only nucleic acid [RNA] and without the protein coat.
Ex : Potato spindle tuber disease.
1 Infectious agents which contains both Nucleic acid [RNA] and protein coat.
Ex : TMV

Question 3.
What do the terms phycobiont and mycobiont signify? [A.P. Mar, 17, Mar. 13]
Answer:
The Algal component in a lichen is called phycobiont. The fungal component in a lichen is called Mycobiont.

Question 4.
What do the terms ‘algal bloom’ and ‘Red Tides’ signify?
Answer:
In cyanobacteria :
The colonies and trichomes or filaments are surrounded by gelatinous sheath which often forms blooms in polluted water bodies called algal blooms.
Ex : Nostoc, Anabaena.

Red Dinoflagellates like “Gonyaulax” undergo rapid multiplication and make the sea “Red” so called Red Tides.

Question 5.
State two economically important uses of heterotrophic bacteria.
Answer:
Heterotrophic Bacteria help in making curd from milk, production of Antibiotics and Nitrogen fixation in legume roots.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 2 Biological Classification

Question 6.
What is the principle underlying the use of cyanobacteria in agricultural fields for crop improvement? [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Cyanobacteria are used in Agricultural fields for crop improvement because they help in Nitrogen fixation and make the soil fertile and also they show oxygenic photosynthesis.

Question 7.
Plants are autotrophic. Name some plants which are partially heterotrophic.
Answer:
Partial heterotrophic plants are viscum, loranthus, striga.

Question 8.
Who proposed five Kingdom classification? How many Kingdoms of this classification contain eukaryotes?
Answer:
R.H.Whittaker proposed five kingdom classification. In this classification, four kingdoms [Protista, Fungi, Plantae, Animalia are Eukaryotes.

Question 9.
Give the main criteria used for classification by Whittaker. [T.S. May. 18, Mar, 15]
Answer:
The main cricteria for five kingdom classification include cell structure, thallus organization. Mode of Nutrition, reproduction and phylogenetic relationships.

Question 10.
Name two diseases caused by Mycoplasmas. [A.P. May. 18]
Answer:
Mycoplasmas cause witches broom disease in plants, pleuropneumonia in cattle and v mycoplasmal urethritis in Humans.

Question 11.
What are slime moulds? Explain what is meant by plasmodium with reference to slime moulds.
Answer:
Slime moulds are saprophytic protists. The multinucleated mass of protoplasm is surrounded by a plasamamembrane under favourable conditions, they form an aggregation called plasmodium.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What are the characteristic features of Euglenoids?
Answer:

  1. Most of the euglenoids are Fresh Water organisms found in stagnant water.
  2. They have a protein rich layer called pellicle which makes body flexible.
  3. They have Two flagella, a short and a long one.
  4. The anterior part of the cell bears an invagination consisting of cytostome, cytopharynx and reservoir.
  5. Eye spot or photosensitive stigma is present in the reservoir.
  6. They behave as heterotrophs when deprived of sunlight.
  7. The reproduction is by lohgitudinal binary fission.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 2 Biological Classification

Question 2.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of Two kingdom classification?
Answer:
Advantages :

  1. The two kingdom classification received considerable recognition from biologists and was in use for quite a long period of time.
  2. Classification of organisms into plants, animals was easily done and was easy to understand.
  3. The character that unified this whole kingdom was that all organisms included had a cell wall in their cells.

Disavantages :
1. There is no clear Cut distinction in the lower forms of life into plants and animals. Euglena for example is a unicellular organism having certain features of criminals and certain features of plants. If has a flagellum which is used for locomotion and food capturing. However it has chloroplasts like plant cells.

2. Chlomyclomonas is a unicellular algue. It is purely antotrophic but has 4 locomotor structures called flagella like protozoans.

3. The classification did not differentiate between the heterotrophic group, fungi and the autotrophic green plants through they also showed a characteristic difference in their wall composition. Hence two kingdom classification used for a lone time was found inadequate.

Question 3.
Give the salient features and importance of chrysophytes. [A.P. Mar, 15, 13]
Answer:
Chrysophytes includes diatoms and golden algae (desmids). They are found in freshwater as well as in marine water.’Most of them are photosynthetic. In diatoms the cell wall form two thin overlapping shells, epitheca over hypotheca which fit together as soap box. The walls are embedded with silica and thus the walls are indestructible. Diatoms leave larger amount of cell wall deposits in their habitat, this accumulation is referred as diatomaceous earth or kieselghur. They reproduce a sexually by Binary fission and sexually by gametes.

Importance :

  1. The diatomaceous soil is used in polishing, filtration of oils 8 syrups.
  2. Diatoms are the chief “producers” in the oceans.

Question 4.
Give a brief account of Dinoflagellates. [A.P. May, 18, Mar, 18] [T.S. Mar, 15]
Answer:

  1. Dinoflagellates are mostly marine and photosynthetic.
  2. The cell wall has stiff cellulose plates on the outer surface.
  3. They have two flagella and produce spinning movements. So these protists are called “whirling whips”.
  4. The nucleus has condensed chromosomes, which are without histones.
  5. Some Dinoflagellates like Noctiluca show bioluminescence.
  6. Red dinoflagellates like Gonyaulax undergo rapid multiplication and make the sea appear red
    (Redtides in Medeterranelian sea)
  7. Toxins produced by them may kill fishes.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 2 Biological Classification

Question 5.
Write the role of Fungi in our daily life. [T.S. May, 18. Mar, 14]
Answer:
The role of Fungi in our dialy life show some uses and disuses. They are :
Uses :

  1. Yeast are used to make bread and beer.
  2. Some Fungi like penicillium are the source of antibiotics. (Penicilin)
  3. Some Fungi like Agaricus are edible mushrooms.

Disuses :

  1. Some Fungi cause rot of orange fruits
  2. Spoilage of bread
  3. White spots are seen in musterd leaves by Albugo.
  4. Some Fungi (Puccinia) cause rust in wheat.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Give the salient features and comparative account of different classes of fungi studied by you.
Answer:
A) Phycomycetes :

  1. They are found in Aquatic habitats and on decaying wood or as obligate parasites on plants. They arealso called algal fungi.
  2. The mycelium is aseptate and coenocytic.
  3. A sexual reproduction takes place by zoospores or by aplanospores.
  4. Zygospores are formed by the fusion of two gametes which may similar (Isogamous) or dissimilar (Anisogamous) or oogamous.
    Ex : Mucor, Rhizopus, Albugo.

B) Ascomycetes :

  1. They are commonly called “sac fungi”
  2. They are unicelluar (yeast) or multicellular (Penicillium).
  3. They are saprophytic, decomposers, parasitic or coprophilous (growing on dung).
  4. The mycelium is Branched and septate.
  5. The reproduce asexually by conidia, produced on conidiophores.
  6. Sexual spores are called ascospores Ex : Aspergillus, pencillium, ckiviceps.

C) Basidiomycetes :

  1. They are commonly known as Mushrooms, bracket fungi or puffballs or club fungi.
  2. They grow in soil, on logs and tree stumps and in living plant bodies as parasites.
    Ex : Rusts.
  3. The mycelium is branched and septate.
  4. The asexual spores are not found but common method is fragmentation.
  5. Sex organs are absent.
  6. Plasmogamy takes place by the fusion of two vegetative cells of different strains or genotypes.
  7. Karyogamy and Meiosis take place in the basidium producing basidiospores.
    Ex : Agaricus, ustilago, polyporus Lycoperdon.

D) Deuteromycetes :

  1. They are commonly known as imperfect fungi.
  2. Some members are saprophytes or parasites, while a large members are decomposers.
  3. The mycelium is branched and septate.
  4. They reproduce asexually and vegetatively.
  5. When the sexual stages were discovered, they were moved into another classes, asco or basidiomycetes.
    Ex : Alternaria, Colletotrichum, Trichoderma.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 2 Biological Classification

Question 3.
Describe briefly different groups of Monerans you have studied.
Answer:
They indued Alio prokaryotes like Archaebacteria, Eubacteria, Mycoplasma and Actinomycetes.

I. Archaebacteria :

  1. They live in salty areas, hot springs or in Marshy places.
  2. The cell wall contains pseudomurein.
  3. The cell membrane contains branched chain lipids.
  4. Methanogens are present in the gut of ruminant animals, and are responsible for the production of methane gas from the dung.

II. Eubacteria :

  1. They occur almost everywhere, such as hotsprings, deserts, snow and deep oceans as parasites and as symbionts.
  2. They are classified-into spherical coccus, rod shaped bacillus, the comma shaped vibrio and the spiral shaped spirillum, based on their shape.
  3. The cell wall is made up of peptidoglycan.
  4. The cell membrane shows infoldings called mesosomes.
  5. They contain 70s type of ribosomes along with naked genetic material (nucleoid).
  6. Some of eubacteria are autotrophic and the vast majority are heterotrophs.
  7. Cyanobacteria like Nostoc and Anabaena are Unicellular, colonial or filamentous, aquatic or terrestrial algae.
  8. They often forms blooms in polluted water bodies. Some of them can fix Atmospheric Nitrogen in specialised cells called Heterocysts.

III. Mycoplasma :

  1. They completely lack a cell wall and are pleomorphic.
  2. They are smallest living cells and can survive without oxygen.
  3. They cause diseases in plants [witches broom]; in cattle (pleuropneumonia) and in humans (Mycoplasmal urethritis).

IV. Actinomycetes :

  1. They are branched, filamentous bacteria.
  2. The cell wall contains mycolic acid.
  3. Most of them are saprophytic and decomposers.
  4. Some are (Mycobacterium and corynebacterium) parasites.
  5. A number of antibiotics are produced from the genus streptomyces.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 2 Biological Classification

Question 3.
Enumerate the salient features of different groups in protista.
Answer:
I. Chrysophytes :

  1. Chrysophytes includes diatoms and golden algae (desmids).
  2. They are found in freshwater as well as in marine water.
  3. Most of them are photosynthetic.
  4. In diatoms the cell walls form two thin overlapping shells, epitheca over hypotheca which fit together as soap box.
  5. The walls are embedded with silica and thus the walls are indestructible.
  6. Diatoms leave larger amount of cell wall deposits in their habitat, this accumulation is referred as diatomaceous earth or kieselghur.
  7. They reproduce asexually by Binary fission and sexually by gametes. ‘

II. Dinoflagellates :

  1. Dinoflagellates are mostly marine and photosynthetic.
  2. The cell was has stiff cellulose plates on the outer surface.
  3. They have two flagella and produce spinning movements. So these protists are called “whirling whips”.
  4. The nucleus has condensed chromosomes, which are without histones.
  5. Some Dinoflagellates like Noctiluca show bioluminescence.
  6. Red dinoflagellates like Gonyaulax undergo rapid multiplication and make the sea appear red (Redtides in Medterranian sea)
  7. Toxins produced by them may kill fishes.

III. Euglenoids :

  1. Most of the euglenoids are Fresh Water organisms found in stagment water.
  2. They have a protein rich layer called pellicle which makes body flexible.
  3. They have Two flagella, a short and a long one.
  4. The anterior part of the cell bears an invagination, consisting of cytostome, cytopharynx and reservoir.
  5. Eye spot or photosensitive stigma is present in the reservoir.
  6. They behave as heterotrophs when deprived of sunlight.
  7. The reproduction is by longitudinal binary fission.

IV. Slime moulds :

  1. They are saprophytic protists. The multinucleated mass of protoplasm is surrounded by a plasamamembrane.
  2. Under suitable conditions, they form an aggregation called plasmodium.
  3. During unfavourable conditions, the plasmodium differentiates and forms fruiting bodies bearing spores at their tips.
  4. The spores are extremely resistant and are dispersed by air.

V. Protozoans :

  1. They live as predators or parasites.
  2. They do not contain cell wall.
  3. The protoplason is surrounded by plasma membrane.
  4. Among them. Amoeboid protozoans live in fersh water, sea water or moist soil. They move and capture their prey by pseudopodia.
    Ex : Entamoeba.
  5. Flagellated protozoans are either free living or parasitic.
  6. They have flagella.
  7. The parasitic forms cause diaseases such as sleeping sickness.
    Ex : Trypanosoma.
  8. Ciliated Protozoans : They are aquatic and actively moving organisms by having cilia.
  9. They have a cavity that opens to outside of the cell surface.
    Ex: Paramoecium.

IV. Sporozoans :
They have an Infectious spore like stage in their life cycle.
Ex : Plasmodium (Malarial parasite) causes Malaria in humans.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
State two economically important uses of :
a) Heterotrophic bacteria b) Archaebacteria
Answer:
a) Heterotrophic bacteria :
They help in making curd from milk, production of Antibiotics and \ Nitrogen fixation in legume roots.

b) Archaebacteria :
1) Produce methane 2) Used by humans in biotechnoogy.

Question 2.
Give a comparative account of the classes of Kingdom Fungi on the basis of the following :
i) mode of nutrition
ii) mode of reproduction.
Answer:
i) mode of nutrition :
a) Phycomycetes : Obligate parasites.
b) Ascomycetes : Saprophytic, decomposers.
c) Basidiomycetes : Parasites.

d) Deuteromycetes :
Saprophytes, decomposers, ii) mode of reproduction :
a) Phycomycetes : Asexually by zoospores or aplanospores, sexually by gametes.
b) Ascomycetes : Asexually by conidia, sexually by ascospores.
c) Basidiomycetes : Asexually by fragmentation, sexually by fusion of two somatic cells.
d) Deuteromycetes : Asexually by conidia.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 2 Biological Classification

Question 3.
Give a brief account of viruses with respect to their structure and nature of genetic material. Also name four common viral diseases.
Answer:
Viruses are made up of Nucleic acid and protein. The Nucleic acid could be either RNA or DNA. The protein part is called capsid which encloses the Nucleic acid. Tobacco Mosaic virus and Human Immuno Virus (HIV) contains RNA as genetic material. Bacteriophages, contain DNA as genetic material.

Common viral diseases are –

  1. Tobacco Mosaic virus.
  2. Potato spindle Tuber disease.
  3. Human Immuno virus.
  4. Scrapie disease of sheep.

Question 4.
Organise a discussion in your class on the topic – Are viruses living or non-living?
Answer:
Viruses are not truly ‘living’. They exist in crystal form outside the host. They are called obligate parasites.

Question 5.
Suppose you accidentally find an old preserved permanent slide without a label and in your effort to identify it, you place the slide under microscope and observe the following features :
a) unicellular body
b) well defined nucleus
c) biflagellate condition – one flagellum lying longitudinally and the other transversely.
What would you identify it as? Can you name the kingdom it belongs to?
Answer:
Protistian cell. They belongs to kingdom protista.

Question 6.
Polluted water bodies have usually high abundance of plants like Nostoc and Oscillatoria. Give reasons.
Answer:
Abundence of reserved food materials.
– Increase the level of dissolved O2 in their environment.
– N2 fixing capacity.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 2 Biological Classification

Question 7.
Cyanobacteria and heterotrophic bacteria have been clubbed together in Eubacteria of Kingdom Monera as per the five kingdom classification, even though the two are vastly different from each other. Is this grouping of the two types of taxa in the same kingdom justified? If so why?
Answer:
Grouping of the two types of tax a in the same kingdom is justified because both organisms contain ‘nif’ genes and are involved in Nitrogen fixation.

Question 8.
What observable features in Trypanosoma would make you classify it under kingdom protista?
Answer:

  1. They are free living or parasitic.
  2. They have flagella.

Question 9.
At a stage of their life cycle, ascomycetous fungi produce the fruiting bodies like cleistothecium perithecium or apothecium. How are these three types of fruiting bodies differ from each ohter?
Answer:
The globose ascocarp without opening is called cleistothecium.
The flask shaped ascocarp with an apical opening is called perithecium.
The cup or saucer shaped ascocarp is called apothecium.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 1 The Living World

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 1st Lesson The Living World Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 1st Lesson The Living World

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What does ICBN Stand for? [T.S. Mar, 18]
Answer:
ICBN stands for “International Code for Botanical Nomenclature”.

Question 2.
What is Flora? [T.S. Mar, 15]
Answer:
Actual account of habitat, distribution and systematic listing of plants of a given area is called Flora.

Question 3.
Define metabolism. What is the difference between anabolism and catabolism?
Answer:
Sum total of all the chemical reactions occuring in the body of an organism is called Metabolism.

AnabolismCatabolism
i) It is a constructive metabolic processi) It is a destructive metabolic process.
ii) Complex molecules are formed from simple molecules by photosynthesis.ii) Complex molecules are broken down into simple molecules by respiration.

Question 4.
Which is the largest botanical garden in the world? Name a few well known botanical gardens in India.
Answer:
Royal Botanical Garden (RBG) at kew (England) is the largest Botanical Garden in the world. Well Known Botanical gardens in India are

  1. Indian Botanical gardens, Howrah.
  2. National Botanical Research Institute, Lucknow.

Question 5.
Define the terms couplet and lead in taxonomic key. [A.P. Mar, 15]
Answer:
The contrasting characters generally in a pair is called “couplet”. Each statement in the key is called “Lead”.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 6.
What is meant by manuals and monographs?
Answer:
Manual is a small book specially designed for ready reference. Monographs contain Information on any one taxon.

Question 7.
What is systematics? [T.S. Mar, 18]
Answer:
“The study of different kinds of organisms, their diversities and also the relationship among them”.

Question 8.
Why are living organisms classified?
Answer:
Living organisms are classified to know their growth, reproduction, ability to sense environment and mount a suitable response, metabolism, ability to self replicate, interaction and emergence.

Question 9.
What is the basic unit of classification? Define it. [A.P. Mar, 17, 14, 13]
Answer:
“Species”.

“Species is defined as a group of Individual organisms with fundamental similarities”.

Question 10.
Give the scientific name of Mango. Identify the generic name and specific epithet. [T.S. Mar, 17]  [A.P. May, 18]
Answer:
Mangifera indica. Its Generic name is “Mangifera” and specific epithet is “indica”.

Question 11.
What is growth? What is the difference between the growth in living organisms and growth in non-living objects?
Answer:
Growth is a permanent and irreversible increase in the size of a living organism.

In Living organisms, growth is from Inside. Where as in Non-living objects like Mountains and sand mounds, growth occurs by accumulation on of material on the outer surface.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is meant by Identification and nomenclature? How is a key helpful in the identification & classification of an organism?
Answer:
Identification is defined as, “Whether a collected organism is entirely new or already known”. Nomenclature is defined as “providing a scientific name to an Identified organism”.

Key is a taxonomical aid used for Identification of plants and animals based on the similarities and dissimilarities. The keys are based on the contrasting characters generally in a pair called couplet. It represents the choice made between two opposite options. Each statement in the key is called lead, separate taxonomic keys are required for each taxonomic category such as family, genus and species for Identification purposes. Keys are generally analytical in nature.

Flora, Manuals, Monographs, and catelogues are also help in correct Identification of plants of a given area.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 2.
What are taxonomical aids? Give the importance of herbaria and museums.
Answer:
Taxonomical aids are the collection of actual specimens of plant and animal species which are useful in agriculture, forestry. Industry and in knowing bio-resources and their diversity.

Herbarium is a store house of collected plant specimens that are dried, pressed, and preserved on sheets. These sheets are used for future use and also carry a label providing information about data and place of collection, English, local and botanical names, family, collector’s name. Herbaria also serve as quick referal systems in taxonomical studies. Museums are generally set up in Educational Institutes. Museums have collections of preserved plant and animals specimens for study and reference.

Question 3.
Define a taxon. Give some examples of taxa at different hierarchial levels.
Answer:
Taxon is defined as, Any unit of category in a Taxonomic system. There are different taxonomic levels such as
a) Species – It is the lowest category in which a group of Individual organisms w|th fundamental similarities are placed.
Example : Mangifera indica (Mango), indica is the specific epithet.

b) Genus – A group of related species which has more characters in common in comparison to species of other genera.
Example : Potato and brinjal are two different species but belong to the genus solanum.

c) Family – It has a group of related genera with still less number of similarities as compared to genus and species.
Example : Solanum, Nicotiana and Datura are three different genera but placed in the family solanaceae.

d) Order – It is the assemblage of families which exhibit a few similar characters.
Example : Based on the floral characters.Solanaceae and Convolvulaceae are included in the order polemoniales.

Question 4.
How are botanical gardens useful in conserving biodiversity? Define the terms Flora, manuals, monographs and catalogues?
Answer:
Botanical gardens have collections of living plants for reference. Plant species in these gardens are grown for identification purposes and each plant is labelled indicating its botanical name and its family.

Flora :
It contains the actual account of habitat, distribution and systematic listing of plants of a given area.

Manual :
It is a small book containing the information for identification of names of species found in an area.

Monograph :
They contain information on any one taxon.

Catelogues :
Books which help in correct identification of plants.

Question 5.
Explain binomial nomenclature.
Answer:
Naming the plants with two words is called Binomial nomenclature. This system was given by Carolus Linnaeus. Naming is done by following some rules. They are

  1. Biological names are generally in Latin and written in Italics.
  2. The first word represents the Genus while the second word represents the species.
  3. Both the words, when handwritten, are separately underlined.
  4. The first word should starts with a capital letter while second word should starts with a small letter.
  5. The name of the auther should be at the end of scientific name in abbreviated form.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is meant by living? Give a detailed account of any four defining features of life forms.
Answer:
The state of Material complex or individual characterized by the capacity to perform certain functional activities including metabolism, growth, and Reproduction.

1) Growth :
All living organisms increase in mass and increase in number. In plants, growth occurs by cell division, continuously throughout their life span. Unicellular organisms also grow in size until they divide by cell division.

2) Reproduction :
“Reproduction means progeny possessing feautures more or less similar to those of parents organisms, reproduce asexually and also by sexual methods. Fungi reproduce asexually by spores. Filamentous algae and Protonema of mosses reproduce by Fragmentation. In unicellular oganisms like Bacteria, unicellular algae or Amoeba reproduction is synonymous with growth. There are many organisms which do not reproduce. Hence reproduction also cannot be an all-inclusive defining characterestic of living organisms.

3) Metabolism :
The sum total of all the chemical reaction occuring in the body of a living organisms is called metabolism. All plants, Animals, Fungi and Microbes exhibit metabolism. No nonliving obejct exhibit metabolism.

4) Ability to sense their surroundings :
All living organisms, have the ability to sense their surroundings or environment and respond to Physical, Chemical or Biological stimuli. This response to environmental stimuli is called Irritability. Plants respond to external factors like light, water, temperature other organisms, pollutants etc. All organismsare aware of their surroundings and is called consciousness. Human beings has self consciousness except patients.

Question 2.
Define the following terms with examples.
i) Class ii) Family iii) Order iv) Genus v) Division
Answer:
i) Class :
A group of related orders constitutes class.
Ex : In plant kingdom, orders like Malvales, Rosales, Polemoniales are included in the class
Dicotyledonae.

ii) Family :
A group of related Genera’ is called family. They are characterised on the basis of both vegetative and reproductive features of plant species.
Ex : Solanum, Nicotiana and Datura are three different Genera but are placed in the family Solanaceae.

iii) Order :
Assemblage of families which exhibit a few similar characters is called order.
Ex : Families like convolvualeceae, Solanaceae are included in the order polemoniales based on the floral characters.

iv) Genus :
A groupo of related species which has more characters in common in comparison to species of other Genera is called Genus.
Ex : Potato (tuberosum) and Brinjal (melongena) are two different species but are placed in the same Genus, ‘Solanum’.

v) Divsion :
‘A group of related .classes’ is called Division.
Ex : Dicotyledonae and Monocotyl’edonae are two classes with a few similar characters are placed in Division spermatophyta.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Some of the properties of tissues are not constituents of their cells. Give two examples to support the statement.
Answer:

  1. Properties of tissues arise as a result of Interactions among the constituent cells.
  2. Properties of cellular organelles arise as a result of Interactions among the molecular components comprising the organelle.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 2.
What do we learn from identification of individuals and populations?
Answer:
It is the prime source of taxonomic studies and also knows about or bioresources and their diversity.

Question 3.
Given below is the scientific name of Mango. Identify the correctly written name.
Mangifera Indica
Mangifera indica
Answer:
Mangifera indica.

Question 4.
Can you identify the correct sequence of taxonomical categories?
a) Species, Order, Division, Kingdom
b) Genus, Species, Order, Kingdom
c) Species, Genus, Order, Phylum
Answer:
C is correct.

Question 5.
Define the following terms :
i) Species ii) Class iii) Family iv) order v) Genus.
Answer:
i) Species :
A group of Individual organisms with fundamental similarities.

ii) Class :
An assemblage of related orders is called class.

iii) Family :
A group of related genera with less number of similarities as compared to genus and species.

iv) order :
An assemblage of families.

v) Genus :
A group of related species which has more characters in comparison to species of other Genera.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 6.
Illustrate the taxonomical hierarchy with suitable example of a plant.
Answer:
Kingdom = Plant kingdom
Division = Spermatophyta
Class = Dicotyledonae
Order = Sapindales
Family = Anacardiaceae
Genus = Mangifera
Species = Indica

Question 7.
What are the distinctive characteristics exhibited by living organisms? Describe them in brief.
Answer:
Growth, reproduction, ability to sense environment, Metabolism, ability to self duplicate.

Growth :
Increase in mass and Increase in number of Individuals.

Reproduction :
It is the production of progeny possessing features more or less similar to those of parents.

Metabolism :
It is the sum total of all the chemical reactions occurring in the body of an organism.

Question 8.
Life forms exhibit ‘unity in diversity’ – Discuss with your teacher.
Answer:
An important aspect of life is its vast diversity built on a base of underlying unity. For example, organisms as outwardly dissimilar as a bacterium, a human and an Oak tree are all composed of the same basic structural element, the cell, which in turn have many similar subcellular and molecular components.

Question 9.
List out the principles followed to provide scientific names for newly found organism?
Answer:

  1. Identification of organisms whether it is entirely new or already known.
  2. Particular organism should be named by same name all over the world. Thus nomenclature is providing a scientific name to an identified organism.

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e)

Practicing the Intermediate 2nd Year Maths 2B Textbook Solutions Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Exercise 6(e) will help students to clear their doubts quickly.

Intermediate 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Exercise 6(e)

I. Evaluate the following integrals.

Question 1.
∫\(\frac{x-1}{(x-2)(x-3)}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 1

Question 2.
∫\(\frac{x^2}{(x+1)(x+2)^2}\)dx
Solution:
∫\(\frac{x^2}{(x+1)(x+2)^2}\) ≡ \(\frac{A}{x+1}+\frac{B}{x+2}+\frac{C}{(x+2)^2}\)
⇒ x² = A(x + 2)² + B(x + 1)(x + 2) + (x + 1) …………….. (1)
Put x = -2 in (1)
(-2)² = A(0) + B(0) + C(-2 + 1) ⇒ C = -4
Put x = -1 in (1)
(-1)² = A(-1 + 2)² + B(0) + C(0)
⇒ A = 1
Equation coeffs. of x² in (1)
1 = A + B
⇒ B = 1 – A = 1 – 1 = 0
∴ \(\frac{x^2}{(x+1)(x+2)^2}=\frac{1}{x+1}+\frac{0}{x+2}+\frac{(-4)}{(x+2)^2}\)
∴ ∫\(\frac{x^2}{(x+1)(x+2)^2}\)dx
= ∫\(\frac{1}{x+1}\)dx – 4∫\(\frac{1}{(x+2)^2}\)dx
= log|x + 1| – 4\(\frac{(-1)}{x+2}\)
= log|x + 1| + \(\frac{4}{x+2}\) + C

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e)

Question 3.
∫\(\frac{x+3}{(x-1)(x^2+1)}\)dx
Solution:
Let \(\frac{x+3}{(x-1)(x^2+1)}=\frac{A}{x-1}+\frac{Bx+C}{x^2+1}\)
⇒ (x + 3) = A(x² + 1) + (Bx + C)(x – 1) …………….. (1)
Put x = 0 in (1)
3 = A(1) + C(-1)
⇒ A – C = 3 ⇒ C = A – 3 = 2 – 3 = -1
Equation coefficient of x² in (1)
0 = A + B
⇒ B = -A = -2
∴ \(\frac{x+3}{(x-1)(x^2+1)}=\frac{+2}{(x-1)}+\frac{-2x-1}{x^2+1}\)
∫\(\frac{x+3}{(x-1)(x^2+1)}\)dx = 2∫\(\frac{1}{x-1}\)dx
-∫\(\frac{2x}{x^2+1}\)dx – ∫\(\frac{1}{x^2+1}\)dx
= 2 log |x – 1| – log |x² + 1| – tan-1(x) + C

Question 4.
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 3
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 2

Question 5.
∫\(\frac{dx}{(e^x+e^{2x}}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 4

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e)

Question 6.
∫\(\frac{dx}{(x+1)(x+2)}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 5

Question 7.
∫\(\frac{1}{(e^x-1}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 6

Question 8.
∫\(\frac{1}{(1-x)(4+x^2)}\)dx
Solution:
Let \(\frac{1}{(1-x)(4+x^2)}=\frac{A}{1-x}+\frac{Bx+C}{4+x^2}\)
⇒ 1 = A(4 + x²) + (Bx + C)(1 – x) ………….. (1)
Put x = 1 in (1)
1 = A(4 + 1) ⇒ A = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Put x = 0 in (1)
1 = A(4) + C(1)
⇒ C = 1 – 4A = 1 – 4(\(\frac{1}{5}\)) = \(\frac{5-4}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
0 = A – B
⇒ B = A = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 7

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e)

Question 9.
∫\(\frac{2x+3}{x^3+x^2-2x}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 8
Put x = 0 in (1), then
3 = A(2)(-1) + B(0) + C(0)
⇒ A = –\(\frac{3}{2}\)
Put x = 1 in (1). Then
2 + 3 = A(0) + B(0) + C(1)(3)
⇒ C = \(\frac{5}{3}\)
Put x = -2 in (1). Then
2(-2) + 3 = A(0) + B(-2)(-2 – 1) + C(0)
⇒ -1 = 6B ⇒ B = \(\frac{-1}{6}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 9

II. Evaluate the following integrals.

Question 1.
∫\(\frac{dx}{6x^2-5x+1}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 10
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 11

Question 2.
∫\(\frac{dx}{x(x+1)(x+2)}\)
Solution:
\(\frac{1}{x(x+1)(x+2)}\) ≡ \(\frac{A}{x}+\frac{B}{x+1}+\frac{C}{x+2}\)
⇒ 1 ≡ A(x + 1)(x + 2) + B(x)(x + 2) + C(x)(x + 1)
Put x = 0
1 = A(1)(2) + B(0) + C(0) ⇒ A = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Put x = -1
1 = A(0) + B(0) + C(-2)(-2 + 1)
⇒ C = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 12

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e)

Question 3.
∫\(\frac{3x-2}{(x-1)(x+2)(x-3)}\)dx
Solution:
\(\frac{3x-2}{(x-1)(x+2)(x-3)}\) ≡ \(\frac{A}{x-1}+\frac{B}{x+2}+\frac{C}{x-3}\)
⇒ 3x – 2 = A(x + 2)(x – 3) + B(x – 1)(x – 3) + C(x – 1)(x + 2)
Put x = 1
3(1) – 2 = A(1 + 2)(1 – 3) + B(0) + C(0)
⇒ A = \(\frac{-1}{6}\)
Put x = 3
3(3) – 2 = A(0) + B(0) + C(3 – 1)(3 + 2)
C = \(\frac{7}{10}\)
Put x = -2
3(-2) – 2 = A(0) + B(-2 – 1)(-2 – 3) + C(0) – 8
= 15B ⇒ B = \(\frac{-8}{15}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 13

Question 4.
∫\(\frac{7x-4}{(x-1)^2(x+2)}\)dx
Solution:
\(\frac{7x-4}{(x-1)^2(x+2)}\) ≡ \(\frac{A}{x-1}+\frac{B}{(x-1)^2}+\frac{C}{x+2}\)
⇒ 7x – 4 = A(x – 1)(x + 2) + B(x + 2) + C(x – 1)² ………….. (1)
Put x = 1 in (1)
7 – 4 = A(0) + B(1 + 2) ⇒ B = 1
Put x = -2 in (1)
7(-2) – 4 = A(0) + B(0) + C(-2 – 1)²
⇒ -18 = 9C ⇒ C = -2
Equating coeffs. of x² in (1)
0 = A + C ⇒ A = -C = 2
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 14

III. Evaluate the following integrals.

Question 1.
∫\(\frac{1}{(x-a)(x-b)(x-c)}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 15
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 16

Question 2.
∫\(\frac{2x+3}{(x+3)(x^2+4)}\)dx
Solution:
\(\frac{2x+3}{(x+3)(x^2+4)}\) = \(\frac{A}{x+3}+\frac{Bx+C}{x^2+4}\)
2x + 3 = A(x² + 4) + (Bx + C)(x + 3)
x = -3 ⇒ -3 = A(9 + 4) = 13A
A = –\(\frac{3}{13}\)
Equating the coefficient of x²
0 = A + B ⇒ B = -A = \(\frac{3}{13}\)
Equating the constants
3 = 4A + 3C
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 17

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e)

Question 3.
∫\(\frac{2x^2+x+1}{(x+3)(x-2)^2}\)dx
Solution:
Let \(\frac{2x^2+x+1}{(x+3)(x-2)^2}\) = \(\frac{A}{x+3}+\frac{B}{x-2}+\frac{C}{(x-2)^2}\)
2x² + x + 1 = A(x – 2)² + B(x + 3)(x – 2) + C(x + 3)
x = 2 ⇒ 8 + 2 + 1 = C(2 + 3) = 5C
⇒ C = \(\frac{11}{5}\)
x = -3 ⇒ 18 – 3 + 1
= A(-5)² = 25 A ⇒ A = \(\frac{16}{25}\)
Equating the coefficients of x²
2 = A + B ⇒ B = 2 – A = 2 – \(\frac{16}{25}\) = \(\frac{34}{25}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 18

Question 4.
∫\(\frac{dx}{x^3+1}\)dx
Solution:
\(\frac{1}{x^3+1}\) = \(\frac{1}{(x+1)(x^2-x+1)}\)
Let \(\frac{1}{x^3+1}\) = \(\frac{1}{x+1}+\frac{1}{x^2-x+1}\)
⇒ 1 = A(x² – x + 1) + (Bx + C)(x + 1) ……………. (1)
Put x = -1 in (1)
1 = A(1 + 1 + 1) + (-B + C)(0)
⇒ 3A = 1 ⇒ A = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Put x = 0 in (1)
1 = A(1) + C(1)
⇒ C = 1 – A = 1 – \(\frac{1}{3}=\frac{2}{3}\)
Equating the coefficients of x²
O = A + B ⇒ B = -A = –\(\frac{1}{3}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 19
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e) 20

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(e)

Question 5.
∫\(\frac{\sin x \cos x}{\cos^2 x+3cos x+2}\)dx
Solution:
Put cos x = t ⇒ – sin x dx = dt
∫\(\frac{\sin x \cos x}{\cos^2 x+3cos x+2}\)dx = ∫\(\frac{-t dt}{t^2+3t+2}\)
= -∫\(\frac{t}{t^2+3t+2}\)dt …………. (1)
Let \(\frac{t}{t^2+3t+2}\) = \(\frac{t}{(t+1)(t+2)}\)
= \(\frac{A}{t+1}+\frac{B}{t+2}\)
⇒ t = A(t + 2) + B(t + 1) ………… (2)
Put t = -1 in (2)
-1 = A(-1 + 2) ⇒ A = -1
Put t = -2 in (2)
-2 = B(-2 + 1) ⇒ B = 2
∴ \(\frac{t}{t^2+3t+2}\) = \(\frac{-1}{t+1}+\frac{2}{t+2}\) ……….. (3)
∴ From (1) & (2)
∫\(\frac{\sin x.\cos x}{\cos^2 x+3cos x+2}\)dx
= -[∫\(\frac{-1}{t+1}\)dt+2∫\(\frac{1}{t+2}\)]
= ∫\(\frac{1}{t+1}\) – 2∫\(\frac{1}{t+2}\)
= log|t + 1| – 2log|t + 2| + C
= log|1 + cos x| – 2log|2 + cos x| + C
= log|1 + cos x| – log(2 + cos x)² + C
= log|\(\frac{1+\cos x}{(2+\cos x)^2}\)| + C

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d)

Practicing the Intermediate 2nd Year Maths 2B Textbook Solutions Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Exercise 6(d) will help students to clear their doubts quickly.

Intermediate 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Exercise 6(d)

I. Evaluate the following integrals.

Question 1.
∫\(\frac{dx}{\sqrt{2x-3x^2+1}}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 1

Question 2.
∫\(\frac{\sin \theta}{\sqrt{2-\cos^2 \theta}}\)dθ
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 2

Question 3.
∫\(\frac{\cos x}{\sin^2 x+4sin x+5}\)dx
Solution:
t = sin x ⇒ dt = cos x dx
I = ∫\(\frac{dt}{t^2+4t+5}\) = ∫\(\frac{dt}{(t+2)^2+1}\)
= tan-1(t + 2) + C
= tan-1(sin x + 2) + C

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d)

Question 4.
∫\(\frac{dx}{1+\cos^2 x}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 3

Question 5.
∫\(\frac{dx}{2\sin^2 x+3\cos^2 x}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 4

Question 6.
∫\(\frac{1}{1+\tan x}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 5

Question 7.
∫\(\frac{1}{1-\cot x}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 6

II. Evaluate the following integrals.

Question 1.
∫\(\sqrt{1+3x-x^2}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 7
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 8

Question 2.
∫\(\frac{9\cos x-\sin x}{4\sin x+5\cos x}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 9

Question 3.
∫\(\frac{2\cos x+3\sin x}{4\cos x+5\sin x}\)dx
Solution:
Let 2 cos c + 3 sin x = A(4 cos x + 5 sin x) + B(-4 sin x + 5 cos x)
Equating the co-efficient of sin x and cos x,
we get
4A + 5B = 2
5A – 4B = 3
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 10
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 11

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d)

Question 4.
∫\(\frac{1}{1+\sin x+\cos x}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 12

Question 5.
∫\(\frac{1}{3x^2+x+1}\)dx
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 13

Question 6.
∫\(\frac{dx}{\sqrt{5-2x^2+4x}}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 14
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 15

III. Evaluate the following integrals.

Question 1.
∫\(\frac{x+1}{\sqrt{x^2-x+1}}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 16
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 17

Question 2.
∫(6x + 5)\(\sqrt{6-2x^2+x}\)dx
Solution:
Let 6x + 5 = A(1 – 4x) + B
Equating the constants
A + B = 5
B = 5 – A = 5 + \(\frac{3}{2}\) = \(\frac{13}{2}\)
∫(6x + 5)\(\sqrt{6-2x^2+x}\)dx
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 18
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 19

Question 3.
∫\(\frac{dx}{4+5\sin x}\)
Solution:
t = tan \(\frac{x}{2}\) ⇒ dt = sec² \(\frac{x}{2}\) . \(\frac{1}{2}\)dx
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 20

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d)

Question 4.
∫\(\frac{1}{2-3\cos 2x}\)dx
Solution:
t = tan x ⇒ dt = sec² x dx
= (1 + tan² x)dx
= (1 +t²)dx
dx = \(\frac{dt}{1+t^2}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 21

Question 5.
∫x\(\sqrt{1+x-x^2}\)dx
Solution:
Let x = A(1 – 2x) + B
Equating the coefficients of x
1 = -2 A ⇒ A = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Equating the constants
0 = A + B ⇒ B = -A = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
∫x\(\sqrt{1+x-x^2}\)dx
= –\(\frac{1}{2}\)∫(1 – 2x)\(\sqrt{1+x-x^2}\)dx + \(\frac{1}{2}\)∫\(\sqrt{1+x-x^2}\)dx
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 22

Question 6.
∫\(\frac{dx}{(1+x)\sqrt{3+2x-x^2}}\)
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 23
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 24

Question 7.
∫\(\frac{dx}{4\cos x+3\sin x}\)
Solution:
Let t = tan\(\frac{x}{2}\) so that dx = \(\frac{2dt}{1+t^2}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 25

Question 8.
∫\(\frac{1}{\sin x+\sqrt{3} \cos x}\)dx
Solution:
Let t = tan \(\frac{x}{2}\) so that dx = \(\frac{2dt}{1+t^2}\)
sin x = \(\frac{2t}{1+t^2}\), cos x = \(\frac{1-t^2}{1+t^2}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 26

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d)

Question 9.
∫\(\frac{dx}{5+4\cos 2x}\).
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 27

Question 10.
∫\(\frac{2\sin x+3\cos x+4}{3\sin x+4\cos x+5}\)dx.
Solution:
Let 2 sin x + 3 cos x + 4
= A(3 sin x + 4 cos x + 5) + 3(3 cos x – 4 sin x) + C
Equating the co-efficient of
sin x, we get 3A – 4B = 2
cos x, we get 4A + 3B = 3
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 28
Equating the constants
4 = 5A + C
C = 4 – 5A = 4 – 5.\(\frac{18}{25}\) = \(\frac{2}{5}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 29
Substituting in (1)
I = \(\frac{18}{25}\). x + \(\frac{1}{25}\) log|3 sin x + 4 cos x + 5| – \(\frac{4}{5\left(3+\tan \frac{x}{2}\right)}\) + C

Question 11.
∫\(\sqrt{\frac{5-x}{x-2}}\) dx on (2, 5).
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 30
Let 5 – x = A. \(\frac{d}{dx}\)(7x – 10 – x²) + B
⇒ 5 – x = A(7 – 2x) + B
Equating coffs. of like terms
-2A = -1 ⇒ A = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
7A + B = 5
7(+\(\frac{1}{2}\)) + B = 5 ⇒ B = 5 – \(\frac{7}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
∴ 5 – x = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(7 – 2x) + \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 31
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 32

Question 12.
∫\(\sqrt{\frac{1+x}{1-x}}\) dx on (-1, 1).
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 33

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d)

Question 13.
∫\(\frac{dx}{(1 – x)\sqrt{3-2x+x^2}}\) on (-1, 3).
Solution:
Put 1 – x = \(\frac{1}{1}\) ⇒ 1 – \(\frac{1}{1}\) = x\(\frac{1}{1-x}\) = t
dx = \(\frac{1}{t^2}\)dt
3 – 2x – x² = 3 – 2(\(\frac{1-1}{1}\)) – (\(\frac{1-1}{1}\))²
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 34
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 35

Question 14.
∫\(\frac{dx}{(x + 2)\sqrt{x+1}}\) on (-1, ∞).
Solution:
Put = x + 1 = t² ⇒ dx = 2t dt and
x + 2 = 1 + t²
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 36

Question 15.
∫\(\frac{dx}{(2x + 3)\sqrt{x+2}}\) on I ⊂ (-2, ∞)\{\(\frac{-3}{2}\)}.
Solution:
Put x + 2 = t² ⇒ dx = 2t dt and
2x + 3 = 2(t² – 2) + 3 = 2t² – 1
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 37

Question 16.
∫\(\frac{1}{(1+\sqrt{x}) \sqrt{x-x^2}}\)dx on (0, 1).
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 38
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 39

Question 17.
∫\(\frac{dx}{(x + 1)\sqrt{2x^2+3x+1}}\) on
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 40
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 41

Question 18.
∫\(\sqrt{e^x-4}\) dx on [loge 4, ∞]
Solution:
Put ex – 4 = t² ⇒ ex dx = 2t dt
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 42

Question 19.
∫\(\sqrt{1+\sec x}\) dx on [(2n – \(\frac{1}{2}\))π – (2n + \(\frac{1}{2}\))π], (n ∈ Z).
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 43
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 44

Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d)

Question 20.
∫\(\frac{dx}{1+x^4}\) on R.
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 45
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 46
Inter 2nd Year Maths 2B Integration Solutions Ex 6(d) 47

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Students get through AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions 16th Lesson Communication Systems which are most likely to be asked in the exam.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions 16th Lesson Communication Systems

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are the basic blocks of a communication system?
Answer:
Basic blocks in a communication system are

  1. Transmitter
  2. Receiver
  3. Channel

Question 2.
What is the ‘World Wide Web” (WWW)?
Answer:
Tern Berners -Lee invented the World Wide Web.
It is an encyclopedia of knowledge accessible to everyone round the clock throughout the year.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Question 3.
Mention the frequency range of speech signals.
Answer:
Speech signals frequency range is 300 Hz to 3100 Hz.

Question 4.
What is sky wave propagation ?
Answer:
In the frequency range from a MHz upto about 30 MHz, long distance communication can be achieved by ionospheric reflection of radio waves back towards the earth. This mode of propagation is called sky wave propagation.

Question 5.
Mention the various parts of the ionosphere ?
Answer:
Parts of ionosphere are

  1. D Part of stratosphere (65-70 km day only),
  2. E Part of stratosphere (100 km day only),
  3. F1 Part of mesosphere (170 km – 190 km),
  4. F2 Part of thermosphere [300 km at night 250 – 400 km during day time].

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Question 6.
Define modulation. Why is it necessary ? [A.P. 17; A.P., T.S. Mar. 16, T.S. Mar. 15, Mar. 14]
Answer:
Modulation : The process of combining low frequency audio signal with high frequency carrier wave is called modulation.
Necessary: Low frequency signals cannot transmit directly. To reduce size of the antenna and to avoid mixing up of signal from different transmitters modulation is necessary.

Question 7.
Mention the basic methods of modulation. [T.S. Mar. 15, 17, A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
The basic methods of modulation are :

  1. Amplitude modulation (AM)
  2. Frequency modulation (FM)
  3. Phase modulation (PM)

Question 8.
Which type of communication is employed in Mobile Phones ? [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Space wave mode of propagation is employed in mobile phones.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
A transmitting antenna at the top of a tower has a height 32 m and the height of the receiving antenna Is 50 m. What is the maximum distance between them for satisfactory communication in LOS mode? Given radius of earth 6.4 × 106 m.
Solution:
dm = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{Rh}_{\mathrm{T}}}+\sqrt{2 \mathrm{Rh}_{\mathrm{R}}}\)
dm = \(\sqrt{2 \times 64 \times 10^5 \times 32}+\sqrt{2 \times 64 \times 10^5 \times 50 \mathrm{~m}}\)
=64 × 102 × \(\sqrt{10}\) +8 × 103 × \(\sqrt{10}\)m = 144 × 102 × \(\sqrt{10}\)m
= 45.5 km.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Question 2.
A message signal of frequency 10 kHz and peak voltage of 10 volts Is used to modulate a carrier of frequency 1 MHz and peak voltage of 20 volts. Determine
(a) modulation index
(b) the side bands produced.
Solution:
a) Modulation index = \(\frac{10}{2}\) = 0.5
b) The side bands are at (1000 + 10 kHz) = 1010 kHz and (1000 – 10 kHz) = 990 kHz.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Students get through AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions 13th Lesson Atoms which are most likely to be asked in the exam.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions 13th Lesson Atoms

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the physical meaning of negative energy of an electron’ ?
Answer:
The ‘negative energy of an electron’ indicates that the electron is bound to the nucleus due to force of attraction.

Question 2.
Sharp lines are present in the spectrum of a gas. What does this indicate ?
Answer:
Sharp lines in the spectrum of gas, indicates bright lines against dark background.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 3.
Name a physical quantity whose dimensions are the same as those of angular momentum.
Answer:
Planck’s constant.

Question 4.
What is the difference between α – particle and helium atom ?
Answer:
Alpha particle

  1. It is a + 2e charged Helium nucleus.
  2. It contains 2 protons and 2 neutrons.

Helium atom

  1. It has no charge.
  2. It contains 2 protons, 2 electrons and 2 neutrons.

Question 5.
Among alpha, beta and gamma radiations, which get affected by the electric field ?
Answer:
Alpha and Beta radiations are get affected by the electric field.

Question 6.
What do you understand by the phrase ground state atom ?
Answer:
If the electron is present in the ground state, it is called ground state atom.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 7.
Why does the mass of the nucleus not have any significance in scattering in Rutherford’s experiment ?
Answer:
The size of the atom is 10-10 m and size of the nucleus is 10-15 m. Hence atom has large empty space. So the mass of nucleus has no significance in Rutherford’s scattering experiment.

Question 8.
The Lyman series of hydrogen spectrum lies in the ultraviolet region. Why ? [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
The calculated values of wavelengths lie in the ultraviolet region of the spectrum will agree with the values of wavelengths observed experimentally by Lyman.

Question 9.
Write down a table giving longest and shortest wavelengths of different spectral series.
Answer:
Wavelength limits of some spectral series of hydrogen.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms 1

Question 10.
Give two drawbacks of Rutherford’s atomic model.
Answer:
Drawbacks of Rutherford’s atomic model:

  1. As the revolving electron loses energy continuously, it must spiral inwards and eventually fall into the nucleus. But matter .is stable, we cannot expect the atom collapse.
  2. The atoms should emit continuous spectrum, but what we observe is only a line spectrum.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 11.
If the kinetic energy of revolving electron in an orbit is K, what is its potential energy and total energy ?
Answer:
For an electron revolving round the nucleus, total energy is always negative and it is numerically equal to kinetic energy.
∴ Total energy = -Kinetic energy = -K
Potential energy is always negative and PE = 2 × TE = -2K

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is impact parameter and angle of scattering ? How are they related to each other ?
Answer:

  1. Impact parameter (b) : Impact parameter is defined as the perpendicular distance of the initial velocity vector of the alpha particle from the central line of the nucleus, when the particle is far away from the nucleus of the atom.
  2. Scattering angle (θ) : The scattering angle (θ) is the angle between the asymtotic direction of approach of the α – particle and the asymtotic direction in which it receeds.
  3. The relation between b and θ is b = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \frac{\mathrm{Ze}^2}{\mathrm{E}}\) cot \(\frac{\theta}{2}\) where E = K.E of α – particle = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mυ2.

Question 2.
Explain the distance of closest approach and impact parameter.
Answer:
Distance of closest approach :

  1. Suppose an α-particle with initial kinetic energy (K.E) is directed towards the centre of the nucleus of an atom.
  2. On account of Coulomb’s repulsive force between nucleus and alpha particle, kinetic energy of alpha particle goes on decreasing and in turn, electric potential energy of the particle goes on increasing.
  3. At certain distance d’ from the nucleus, K. E of α-particle reduces to zero. The particle stops and it cannot go closer to the nucleus. It is repelled by the nucleus and therefore it retraces its path, turning through 180°.
  4. Therefore, the distance d is known as the distance of closest of approach.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms 2
    The closest distance of approach,
    d = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \times \frac{Z e^2}{\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)}\)
  5. Impact parameter (b) : Impact parameter is defined as the ⊥r distance of the initial velocity vector of the α – particle from the central line of the nucleus, when the particle is far away from the nucleus of the atom.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms 3

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 3.
Describe Rutherford atom model. What are the draw backs of this model ?
Answer:
Rutherford atom model: The essential features of Rutherford’s nuclear model of the atom or planetary model of the atom are as follows :

  1. Every atom consists of tiny central core, called the atomic nucleus, in which the entire positive charge and almost entire mass of the atom are concentrated.
  2. The size of nucleus is of the order of 10-15m, which is very small as compared to the size of the atom which is of the order of 10-10 m.
  3. The atomic nucleus is surrounded by certain number of electrons. As atom on the whole is electrically neutral, the total negative charge of electrons surrounding the nucleus is equal to total positive charge on the nucleus.
  4. These electrons revolve around the nucleus in various circular orbits as do the planets around the sun. The centripetal force required by electron for revolution is provided by the electrostatic force of attraction between the electrons and the nucleus.

Drawbacks : According to classical E.M. theory,

  1. the revolving electron loses energy continuously, it must spiral inwards and eventually fall into the nucleus. As matter is stable, we cannot expect the atoms to collapse.
  2. since the frequency of radiation emitted is the same as the frequency of revolution, the atom should radiate a continuous spectrum, but what we observe is only a line spectrum.

Question 4.
What are the limitations of Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom ? [A.P. Mar. 17; Mar. 14]
Answer:
Limitations of Bohr’s theory of Hydrogen atom :

  1. This theory is applicable only to simplest atom like hydrogen, with z = 1. The theory fails in case of atoms of other elements for which z > 1.
  2. The theory does not explain why orbits of electrons are taken as circular, while elliptical orbits are also possible.
  3. Bohr’s theory does not say anything about the relative intensities of spectral lines.
  4. Bohr’s theory does not take into account the wave properties of electrons.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 5.
Write a short note on Debroglie’s explanation of Bohr’s second postulate of quantization. [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Debroglie’s explanation of Bohr’s second postulate of quantization :

  1. The second postulate of Bohr atom model says that angular momentum of electron orbiting around the nucleus is quantized i.e., mυr = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\) where n = 1, 2, 3,….
  2. According to Debroglie, the electron in its circular orbit, as proposed by Bohr, must be seen as a particle wave.
  3. When a string fixed at two ends is plucked, a large number of wavelengths are excited and standing wave is formed.
  4. It means that in a string, standing waves form when total distance travelled by a wave down the string and back is an integral number of wavelengths.
  5. According to Debroglie, a stationary orbit is that which contains an integral number of Debrogile waves associated with the revolving electron.
  6. For an electron revolving in nth circular orbit of radius rn, total distance covered = circumference of the orbit = 2πrn
    ∴ For permissible orbit, 2πrn = nλ
  7. According to Debrogile, λ = \(\frac{h}{m v_n}\)
    Where υn is speed of electron revolving in nth orbit
    ∴ 2πrn = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{\mathrm{m} v_{\mathrm{n}}}\)
    nrn = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}=\mathrm{n}\left(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \pi}\right)\)
    i.e., angular momentum of electron revolving in nth orbit must be an integral multiple of \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \pi}\), which is the quantum condition proposed by Bohr in second postulate.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 6.
Explain the different types of spectral series in hydrogen atom. [T.S. Mar. 16, A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
The atomic hydrogen emits a line spectrum consisting of five series.

  1. Lyman series : v = Rc \(\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 2, 3, 4
  2. Balmer series : v = Rc \(\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 3, 4, 5.
  3. Paschen series : v = Rc \(\left(\frac{1}{3^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 4, 5, 6
  4. Brackett series: v = Rc \(\left(\frac{1}{4^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 5, 6, 7
  5. Pfund series: v = Rc \(\left(\frac{1}{5^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 6, 7, 8

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
State the basic postulates of Bohr’s theory of atomic spectra. Hence obtain an expression for the radius of orbit and the energy of orbital electron in a hydrogen atom. [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
a) Basic postulates of Bohr’s theory are

  1. The electron revolves round a nucleus in an atom in various orbits known as stationary orbits. The electrons cannot emit radiation when moving in their own stationary levels.
  2. The electron can revolve round the nucleus only in allowed orbits whose angular momentum is the integral multiple of \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \pi}\)
    i.e., mυnrn = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\) …………… (1)
    where n = 1, 2, 3 …………..
    If an electron jumps from higher energy (E2) orbit to the lower energy (E1) orbit, the difference of energy is radiated in the form of radiation.
    i.e., E = hv = E2 – E1 ⇒ v = \(\frac{E_2-E_1}{h}\) …………… (2)

b) Energy of emitted radiation: In hydrogen atom, a single electron of charge – e, revolves around the nucleus of charge e in a circular orbit of radius rn.
1) K.E. of electron : For the electron to be in circular orbit, centripetal force = The electrostatic force of attraction between the electron and nucleus.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms 4
3) Radius of the oribit: Substituting the value of (6) in (2),
\(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}}\left(\frac{\mathrm{n}^2 \mathrm{~h}^2}{4 \pi^2 \mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}^2 \mathrm{~m}^2}\right)=\frac{\mathrm{Ke}^2}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}^2}\)
rn = \(\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m K e^2}\) ……………. (1)
∴ rn = 0.53 n2

4) Total energy (En) : Revolving electron possess K.E. as well as P.E.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms 5

Problems

Question 1.
The radius of the first electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is 5.3 x HTum. What is the radius of the second orbit ?
Solution:
∴ rn ∝ n2
\(\) ⇒ r2 = 4r1
∴ r2 = 4 × 5.3 × 10-11 = 2.12 × 10-10m.

Question 2.
The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of the hydrogen atom is -3.4eV. What is the potential energy of the electron in this state?
Solution:
In 1st orbit, E = -3.4 eV
Total energy E = \(\frac{\mathrm{KZe}^2}{2 \mathrm{r}}-\frac{\mathrm{KZe}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{KZe}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\) = U(say)
E = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{2}\) – u = \(\frac{\mathrm{-U}}{2}\)
U = -2E
∴ U = -2 × -3.4 = 6.8 eV.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 3.
The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of hydrogen atom is -3.4eV. What is the kinetic energy of the electron in this state ?
Solution:
In Hydrogen like atom, we know that
K = – Total energy E
Here E = – 3.4eV
∴ K = -(-3.4) = 3.4 eV . . ,

Question 4.
Prove that the ionisation energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV.
Solution:
n = 1 corresponds to ground state.
E = \(\frac{-13.6}{\mathrm{n}^2}\) eV
E = \(\frac{-13.6}{\mathrm{1}^2}\) eV
E = -13.6 eV
The minimum energy required to free the electron from the ground state of hydrogen atom = 13.6 eV.
∴ Ionisation energy of hydrogen atom = 13.6 eV

Question 5.
Calculate the ionization energy for a lithium atom.
Solution:
For 3Li7 atom, Z = 3, n = 2 [∵Li = 1s2 2s1]
En = \(\frac{13.6 \mathrm{Z}^2}{\mathrm{n}^2}\) eV
= \(\frac{13.6 \times(3)^2}{4}\) = 30.6 eV
∴ Ionization energy of Lithium = 30.6eV

Question 6.
The wavelength of the first member of Lyman series is 1216 A. Calculate the wavelength of second member of Balmer series.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms 6

Textual Examples

Question 1.
In the Rutherford’s nuclear model of the atom, the nucleus (radius about 10-15m) is analogous to the sun about which the electron move in orbit (radius ≈ 10-10m) like the earth orbits around the sun. If the dimensions of the solar system had the same proportions as those of the atom, would the earth be closer to or farther away from the sun than actually it is ? The radius of earth’s orbit is about 1.5 × 1011m. The radius of sun is taken as 7 × 108 m.
Solution:
The ratio of the radius of electron’s orbit to the radius of nucleus is (10-10 m)/(10-15 m) = 105, that is, the radius of the electron’s orbit is 105 times larger than the radius of nucleus. If the radius of the earth’s orbit around the sun were 105 times larger than the radius of the sun, the radius of the earth’s orbit would be 105 × 7 × 108 m = 7 × 1013 m. This is more than 100 times greater than the actual orbital radius of earth. Thus, the earth would be much farther away from the sun.

It implies that an atom contains a much greater fraction of empty space than our solar system does.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 2.
In a Geiger-Marsden experiment, what is the distance of closest approach to the nucleus of a 7.7 MeV α-particle before it comes momentarily to rest and reverses its direction?
Solution:
The key idea here is that throughout the scattering process, the total mechanical energy of the system consisting of an α-particle and a gold nucleus is conserved. The system’s initial mechanical energy is Ei; before the particle and nucleus interact, and it is equal to its mechanical energy Ef when the α-particle momentarily stops. The initial energy Et is just the kinetic energy K of the incoming α-particle. The final energy Ef is just the electric potential energy U of the system. The potential energy U can be calculated from Equation.
F = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \frac{(2 \mathrm{e})(\mathrm{Ze})}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
Let d be the centre-to-centre distance between the α-particle and the gold nucleus when the α-particle is at its stopping point. Then we can write the conservation of energy
Ei = Ef as
K = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \frac{(2 \mathrm{e})(\mathrm{Ze})}{\mathrm{d}}=\frac{2 \mathrm{Ze}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{~d}}\)
Thus the distance of closest approach d is given by
d = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{Ze}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{~K}}\)
The maximum kinetic energy found in α-particles of natural origin is 7.7 MeV or 1.2 × 10-12 J. Since 1/4πε0 = 9.0 × 109N m2/C2. Therefore with e = 1.6 × 10-19C, we have,
d = \(\frac{(2)\left(9.0 \times 10^9 \mathrm{Nm}^2 / \mathrm{C}^2\right)\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{C}\right)^2 \mathrm{Z}}{1.2 \times 10^{-12} \mathrm{~J}}\)
= 3.84 × 10-16 Zm
The atomic number of foil material gold is Z = 79, so that
d (Au) = 3.0 × 10-14m = 30 fm. (1 fm (i.e. fermi) = 10-15m.)
The radius of gold nucleus is, therefore, less than 3.0 × 10-14 m. This is not in very good agreement with the observed result as the actual radius of gold nucleus is 6 fm. The cause of discrepancy is that the distance of closest approach is considerably larger than the sum of the radii of the gold nucleus and the a-particle. Thus, the α-particle reverses its motion without ever actually touching the gold nucleus.

Question 3.
It is found experimentally that 13.6 eV energy is required to separate a hydrogen atom into a proton and an electron. Compute the orbital radius and the velocity of the electron in a hydrogen atom.
Solution:
Total energy of the electron in hydrogen atom is – 13.6 eV = -13.6 × 1.6 × 10-19J
= -2.2 × 10-18 J.
Thus from equation, E = – \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\) we have
– \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\) = 2.2 10-18 J
This gives the orbital radius
r = – \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{\left(9 \times 10^9 \mathrm{Nm}^2 / \mathrm{C}^2\right)\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{C}\right)^2}{(2)\left(-2.2 \times 10^{-18} \mathrm{~J}\right)}\)
= 5.3 × 10-11 m.
The velocity of the revolving electron can be computed from Equation r = –\(\frac{e^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 r m v^2}\)
with
m = 9.1 × 10-31kg,
υ = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\sqrt{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{mr}}}\) = 2.2 × 106 m/s

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 4.
According to the classical electromagnetic theory, calculate the initial frequency of the light emitted by the electron revolving around a proton in hydrogen atom.
Solution:
From Examjple 3 we know that velocity of electron moving around a proton in hydrogen atom in an orbit of radius 5.3 × 10-11 m is 2.2 × 10-6 m/s. Thus, the frequency of the electron moving around the proton is
v = \(\frac{v}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}=\frac{2.2 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{2 \pi\left(5.3 \times 10^{-11} \mathrm{~m}\right)}\)
≈ 6.6 × 1015 Hz.
According to the classical electromagnetic theory we know that the frequency of the electromagnetic waves emitted by the revolving electrons is equal to the frequency of its revolution around the nucleus. Thus the initial frequency of the light emitted is 6.6 × 1015Hz.

Question 5.
A 10 kg satellite circles earth once every 2 h in an orbit having a radius of 8000 km. Assuming that Bohr’s angular momentum postulate applies to satellites just as it does to an electron in the hydrogen atom, find the quantum number of the orbit of the satellite.
Solution:
From equation, we have
nrn = nh/2π
Here m = 10 kg and rn = 8 × 106 m. We have the time period T of the circling satellite as 2h. That is T = 7200 s.
Thus the velocity υn = 2π rn/T
The quantum number of the orbit of satellite
n = (2π rn)2 × m(T × h)
Substituting the values,
n = (2π × 8 × 106m)2 × 10/(7200 s × 6.64 × 10-34 J s)
= 5.3 × 1045
Note that the quantum number for the satellite motion is extremely large. In fact for such large quantum numbers the results of quantisation conditions tend to those of classical physics.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 6.
Using the Rydberg formula, calculate the wavelengths of the first four spectral lines in the Lyman series of the hydrogen spectrum.
Solution:
The Rydberg formula is
hc/λif = \(\left(\frac{1}{n_{\mathrm{f}}^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{i}}^2}\right)\)
The wavelengths of the first four lines in the Lyman series correspond to transitions from ni = 2, 3, 4, 5 to nf = 1. We know that
\(\frac{\mathrm{me}^4}{8 \varepsilon_0^2 \mathrm{~h}^2}\) = 13.6 eV = 21.76 × 10-19 J
Therefore,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Atoms 7
Substituting, ni = 2, 3, 4, 5 we get λ21 = 1218 Å, λ31 = 1028 Å, λ41 = 974.3 Å, and λ51 = 951.4 Å.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Students get through AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions 12th Lesson Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter which are most likely to be asked in the exam.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions 12th Lesson Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are “cathode rays”? [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Cathode rays are streams of fast-moving electrons or negatively charged particles.

Question 2.
What important fact did Millikan’s experiment establish?
Answer:
Millikan’s experiment established that electric charge is quantized. That means the charge on anybody (oil drop) is always an integral multiple of the charge of an electron, i.e., Q = ne.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 3.
What is “work function”? [T.S. Mar. 17, 15]
Answer:
The minimum energy required to liberate an electron from a photo metal surface is called the work function, Φ0.

Question 4.
What is “photoelectric effect” ?
Answer:
When light of sufficierit energy is incident on the photometal surface, electrons are emitted. This phenomenon is called photoelectric effect.

Question 5.
Give examples of “photosensitive substances”. Why are they called so ?
Answer:
Examples of photosensitive substances are Li, Na, K, Rb and Cs etc.
The work function of alkali metals is very low. Even the ordinary visible light, alkali metals can produce photoelectric emission. Hence they are called photosensitive substances.

Question 6.
Write down Einstein’s photoelectric equation. [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Einstein’s photoelectric equation is given by Kmax = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2max = hυ – Φ0

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 7.
Write down de-Broglie’s relation and explain the terms therein. [T.S. & A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
The de-Broglie wave length (λ) associated with a moving particle is related to its momentum (p) is λ = \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{m v}\), where h is planck’s constant.

Question 8.
State Heisenberg’s Uncertainity Principle. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Uncertainity principle states that “it is impossible to measure both position (∆x) and momentum of an electron (∆p) [or any other particle] at the same time exactly”, i.e., ∆x . ∆p ≈ h where ∆x is uncertainty in the specification of position and ∆p is uncertainty in the specification of momentum.

Question 9.
The photoelectric cut off voltage in a certain experiment is 1.5 V. What is the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted ? [Mar. 11]
Answer:
Cut off voltage, V0 = 1.5 V; Maximum kinetic energy, (KE)max = eV0 = e × 1.5 = 1.5eV

Question 10.
An electron, an α-particle and a proton have the same kinetic energy. Which of these particles has the shortest de Broglie wavelength ? [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
For a particle,
de Broglie wavelength, λ = h/p
Kinetic energy, K = p2/2m
Then, λ = h/\(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mK}}\)
For the same kinetic energy K, the de Broglie wavelength associated with the particle is inversely proportional to the square root of their masses.A proton AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 1 is 1836 times massive than an electron and an a-particle \(\left({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\right)\) four times that of a proton.
Hence, α-particle has the shortest de Broglie wavelength.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Qeustion 11.
What is-the de Broglie wavelength associated with an electron, accelerated through a potential difference of 100 volts ? [A.P. Mar. 15]
Solution:
Accelerating potential V = 100 V The de Broglie wavelngth λ is
λ = h/p = \(\frac{1.227}{\sqrt{\mathrm{V}}}\) nm
λ = \(\frac{1.227}{\sqrt{100}}\) nm = 0.123 nm
The de Broglie wavelength associated with an electron in this case is of the order of X-ray wavelengths.

Question 12.
If the wave length of electro magnetic radiation is doubled, what happens to energy of photon ? [IPE 2015 (TS)]
Answer:
E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) ⇒ E ∝ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\), since wave length of photon is doubled, its energy becomes halved.

Question 13.
In an experiment on photoelectric effect, the slope of the cut-off voltage versus frequency of incident light is found to be 4.12 × 10-15 V s. Calculate the value of Planck’s constant.
Solution:
Given, slope of graph tan θ = 4.12 × 10-15 V – s;
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 2
For slope of graph, tan θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{v}}\)
We know that hv = eV
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{v}}=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{e}} \Rightarrow \frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{e}}\) = 4.12 × 10-15; h = 4.12 × 10-15 × 1.6 × 10-19 = 6.592 × 10-34 J – s.

Question 14.
The energy flux of sunlight reaching the surface of the earth is 1.388 × 103 W/m2. How many photons (nearly) per square metre are incident on the Earth per second ? Assume that the photons in the sunlight have an average wavelength of 550 nm.
Solution:
Given, P = 1.388 × 103 W/m2; λ = 550 nm = 550 × 10-9 m ,
h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-s; c = 3 × 108 m/s
Energy of each photon E = \(\frac{\text { hc }}{\lambda}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{550 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 3.616 × 10-19 J
No. of photons incident on the earth’s surface, N = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{E}}=\frac{1.388 \times 10^3}{3.66 \times 10^{-19}}\)
∴ N = 3.838 × 1021 photons/m2 – s.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 15.
Show that the wavelength of electromagnetic radiation is equal to the de-Brogile wavelength of its quantum (photon). [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Wave length of electromagnetic wave of frequency v and velocity C is given by,
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}}{\mathrm{v}} \Rightarrow \lambda=\frac{\mathrm{C}}{\mathrm{v}} \times \frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{h}}=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\left(\frac{\mathrm{hv}}{\mathrm{C}}\right)}=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}\)    (∵ \(\frac{\mathrm{hv}}{\mathrm{C}}\) = p)
Hence, we can say wavelength of electromagnetic radiation is equal to the de-Brogile wavelength.

Sample Problem :

Question 1.
Calculate the (a) momentum and (b) dE-Brogile wavelength of the electrons accelerated through a potential difference of 56 V. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
a) Mass of the electron, m = 9 × 10-31 kg;
Potential difference, V = 56V
Momentum of electron, mv = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{eVm}}=\sqrt{2 \times\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right) \times 56 \times 9 \times 10^{-31}}\) = 4.02 × 10-24kg ms-1

b) de-Broglie wavelength, λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}=\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-34}}{4.04 \times 10^{-24}}\) = 1.64 × 10-10m

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Describe an experiment to study the effect of frequency of incident radiation on ‘stopping potential’.
Answer:
Experimental study of the effect of frequency of incident radiation on stopping potential:

  1. The experimental set up is shown in fig.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 3
  2. Monochromatic light of sufficient energy (E = hv) from source ‘s’ is incident on photosensitive plate ‘C’ (emitter), electrons are emitted by it.
  3. The electrons are collected by the plate A (collector), by the electric field created by the battery.
  4. The polarity of the plates C and A can be reversed by a commutator.
  5. For a particular frequency of incident radiation, the minimum negative (retarding) potential V0 given to the plate A for which the photo current stops or becomes zero is called stopping potential.
  6. The experiment is repeated with different frequencies, and their different stopping potential are measured with voltmeter.
  7. From graph, we note that
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 4

    • The values of stopping potentials are different for different frequencies.
    • The value of stopping potential is more negative for radiation of highef incident frequency.
    • The value of saturation current depends on the intensity of incident radiation but it is independent of the frequency of the incident radiation.

Question 2.
What is the deBroglie wavelength of a ball of mass 0.12 Kg moving with a speed of 20 ms-1? What can we infer from this result ?
Answer:
Given, m = 0.12 kg; υ = 20 m/s; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-s;
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{0.12 \times 20}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{2.4}\)
∴ λ = 2.762 × 10-34 m = 2762 × 10-21 Å.
The wave length of ball is very very small. Hence, its motion can be observed.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 3.
What is the effect of (i) intensity of light (ii) potential on photoelectric current ?
Answer:
(i) Effect of intensity of light on photoelectric current:
1) When the intensity (I) of incident light, with frequency greater than the threshold frequency (υ > υ0) is increased then the number of photoelectrons emitted increases i.e., the value of photoelectric current (i) increases, ie., i ∝ I.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 5
ii) The effect of potential on photoelectric current:

  1. On increasing the positive potential on collecting electrode, the photoelectric current increases. At a particular positive potential, the photocurrent becomes maximum which is known as saturated current.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 6
  2. On increasing the value of negative potential on collecting electrode, the photoelectric current gradually goes on decreasing. At a particular negative potential the value of photoelectric current becomes zero. This is known as stopping potential.
  3. Stopping potential does not depend on the intensity of incident light. On increasing intensity, the value of saturated current increases, whereas the stopping potential remains unchanged.

Sample Problem :

Question 1.
The work function of caesium metal is 2.14 eV When light of frequency 6 × 1014 Hz is incident on the metal surface, photoemission of electrons occurs. What is the (a) maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons, (b) stopping potential and (c) maximum speed of the emitted photoelectrons ? [A.P. Mar. 16]
Solution:
Given, Φ0 = 2.14 eV; v = 6 × 1014 Hz
a) KEmax = hv – Φ0 = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 6 \times 10^{14}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) – 2.14
∴ KEmax = 0.35 eV

b) KEmax = eV0 ⇒ 0.35 eV = eV0
∴ V0 = 0.35 V

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 7

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
How did Einstein’s photoelectric equation explain the effect of intensity and potential on photoelectric current ? How did this equation account for the effect of frequency of ‘ incident light on stopping potential ?
Answer:

  1. Einstein postulated that a beam of light consists of small energy packets called photons or quanta.
  2. The energy of photon is E = hv. Where ‘h1 is Planck’s constant; v is frequency of incident light (or radiation).
  3. If the absorbed energy of photon is greater than the work function (Φ0 = hυ0), the electron is emitted with maximum kinetic energy i.e., kmax = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}_{\max }^2\) = eV0 = hv – Φ0. This equation is known as Einstein’s photoelectric equation.
  4. Effect of intensity of light on photoelectric current:
    When the intensity (I) of incident light, with frequency greater than the threshold frequency (υ > υ0) is increased then the number of photoelectrons emitted decreases i.e., the value of photoelectric current (i) increases, ie., i ∝ I.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 5
  5. The effect of potential on photoelectric current:
    • On increasing the positive potential on collecting electrode, the photoelectric current increases. At a particular positive potential, the photocurrent becomes maximum which is known as saturated current.
      AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 6
    • On increasing the value of negative potential on collecting electrode, the photoelectric current gradually goes on decreasing. At a particular negative potential the value of photoelectric current becomes zero. This is known as stopping potential (v0).
    • Stopping potential does not depend on the intensity of incident light. On increasing intensity, the value of saturated current increases, whereas the stopping potential remains unchanged.
  6. The effect of frequency of incident radiation on stopping potential:
    On increasing the frequency of incident light, the value of stopping potential goes on increasing gradually as shown in fig. That means kmax increases eV0 also increases.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 8
  7. From the graph, we note that
    • For a given photosensitive metal, the cut off potential (v0) varies linearly with the frequency of the incident radiation.
    • For a given photosensitive metal, there is a certain minimum cut off frequency υ0 (called threshold frequency) for which the stopping potential is zero.
      AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 9
  8. From the graph we note that
    • The value of cut-off potential is different for radiation of different frequency.
    • The value of stopping potential is more negative for radiation of higher incident frequency.
  9.  From above experiments, it is found that, if the incident radiation is of higher frequency than that of threshold frequency, the photoelectric emission is. possible.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Monochromatic light of frequency 6.0 × 1014 Hz is produced by a laser. The power emitted is 2.0 × 10-3 W. (a) What is the energy of a photon in the light beam ? (b) How many photons per second, on an average, are emitted by the source ?
Solution:
a) Each photon has an energy
E = hv = (6.63 × 10-34 J s) (6.0 × 1014 Hz)
= 3.98 × 10-19 J

b) If N is the number of photons emitted by the source per second, the power P transmitted in the beam equals N times the energy per photon E, so that P = NE.
Then N = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{E}}=\frac{2.0 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~W}}{3.98 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}\)
= 5.0 × 1015 photons per second.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 2.
The work function of caesium is 2.14 eV. Find (a) the threshold frequency for caesium, and (b) the wavelength of the incident light if the photocurrent is brought to zero by a stopping potential of 0.60 V. [A.P. Mar. 16]
Solution:
a) For the cut-off or threshold frequency, the energy hv0 of the incident radiation must be equal to work function Φ0, so that
v0 = \(\frac{\phi_0}{\mathrm{~h}}=\frac{2.14 \mathrm{eV}}{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{Js}}\)
= \(\frac{2.14 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~s}}\) = 5.16 × 1014 Hz
Thus, for frequencies less than this threshold frequency, no photoelectrons are ejected.

b) Photocurrent reduces to zero, when maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons equals the potential energy e V0 by the retarding potential V0. Einstein’s Photoelectric equation is
eV0 = hv – Φ0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) – Φ0
or λ = hc/(eV0 + Φ0)
= \(\frac{\left(6.63 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~s}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\right)}{(0.60 \mathrm{eV}+2.14 \mathrm{eV})}\)
= \(\frac{19.89 \times 10^{-26} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~m}}{(2.74 \mathrm{eV})}\)
λ = \(\frac{19.89 \times 10^{-26} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~m}}{2.74 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}\) = 454 nm

Question 3.
The wavelength of light in the visible region is about 390 nm for violet colour, about 550 nm (average wavelength) for yellow-green colour and about 760 nm for red colour.
(a) What are the energies of photons in (eV) at the (i) violet end, (ii) average wavelength, yellow-green colour, and (iii) red end of the visible spectrum ? (Take h = 6.63 × 10-34 J s and 1 eV = 1.6 × 10-19 J.)
(b) From which of the photosensitive materials with work functions listed in table and using the results of (i), (ii) and (iii) of (a) can you build a photoelectric device that operates with visible light ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 10
Solution:
a) Energy of the incident photon,
E = hv = hc/λ
E = (6.63 × 10-34 J s) (3 × 108 m/s)/λ.
= \(\frac{1.989 \times 10^{-25} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~m}}{\lambda}\)
i) For violet light,
λ1 = 390 nm (lower wavelength end)
Incident photon energy,
E1 = \(\frac{1.989 \times 10^{-25} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~m}}{390 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\)
5.10 × 10-19 J = \(\frac{5.10 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J} / \mathrm{eV}}\)
= 3.19 eV

ii) For yellow-green light,
λ2 = 550 nm (average wavelength)
Incident photon energy,
E2 = \(\frac{1.989 \times 10^{-25} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~m}}{550 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\)
= 3.62 × 10-19 J = 2.26 eV.

iii) For red light,
λ3 = 760 nm (higher wavelength end)
Incident photon energy,
E3 = \(\frac{1.989 \times 10^{-25} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~m}}{760 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\)
= 2.62 × 10-19 J = 1.64 eV

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

b) For a photoelectric device to operate, we require incident light energy E to be equal to or greater than the work function Φ0 of the material. Thus, the photoelectric device will operate with violet light (with E = 3.19 eV) photosensitive material Na (with Φ0 = 2.75 eV), K (with Φ0 = 2.30 eV) and Cs (with Φ0 = 2.14 eV). It will also operate with yellow-green light (with E = 2.26 eV) for Cs (with Φ0 = 2.14 eV) only. However, it will not operate with red light (with E = 1.64 eV) for any of these photosensitive materials.

Question 4.
What is the de Broglie wavelength associated with (a) an electron moving with a speed of 5.4 × 106 m/s, and (b) a ball of mass 150 g travelling at 30.0 m/s ?
Solution:
a) For the electron :
Mass m= 9.11 × 10-31 kg, speed υ = 5.4 × 106 m/s. Then, momentum
P = mυ = 9.11 × 10-31 (kg) × 5.4 × 106 (m/s)
P = 4.92 × 10-24 kg m/s
de Broglie wavelength, λ = h/p
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~s}}{4.92 \times 10^{-24} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}}\)
λ = 0.135 nm

b) For the ball:
Mass m’ = 0.150 kg, speed υ’ = 30.0 m/s.
Then momentum
p’ = m’υ’ = 0.150 (kg) × 30.0 (m/s)
p’ = 4.50 kg m/s
de Broglie wavelength λ’ = h/p’.
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{\pm 34} \mathrm{Js}}{4.50 \times \mathrm{kg} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}}\)
λ’ = 1.47 × 10-34 m
The de Broglie wavelength of electron is comparable with X-ray wavelengths. However, for the ball it is about 10-19 times the size of the proton, quite beyond experimental measurement.

Question 5.
An electron, an a-particle and a proton have the same kinetic energy. Which of these particles has the shortest de Broglie wavelength ? [T.S. Mar. 15]
Solution:
For a particle,
de Broglie wavelength, λ = h/p
Kinetic energy, K = p2/2m
Then, λ = h /\(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mK}}\)
For the same kinetic energy K, the de Broglie wavelength associated with the particle is inversely proportional to the square root of their masses. A proton \(\left({ }_1^1 \mathrm{He}\right)\) is 1836 times massive than an electron and an a-particle \(\left({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\right)\) four times that of a proton
Hence, α-particle has the shortest de Broglie wavelength.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 6.
A particle is moving three times as fast as an electron. The ratio of the de Broglie wavelength of the particle to that of the electron is 1.813 × 10-4. Calculate the particle’s mass and identify the particle.
Solution:
de Broglie wavelength of a moving particle, having mass m and velocity υ :
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\)
Mass, m = h/A.
For an electron, mass me = h/λe υe
Now, we have υ/υe = 3 and
λ/λe = 1.813 × 10-4
Then, mass of the particle,
m = me \(\left(\frac{\lambda_{\mathrm{e}}}{\lambda}\right)\left(\frac{v_{\mathrm{e}}}{v}\right)\)
m = (9.11 × 10-31 kg) × (1/3) × (1/1.813 × 10-4)
m = 1.675 × 10-27 kg.
Thus, the particle, with this mass could be a proton or a neutron.

Question 7.
What is the de Broglie wavelength associated with an electron, accelerated through a potential difference of 100 volts? [A.P. Mar. 15]
Solution:
Accelerating potential V = 100 V The de Broglie wavelength λ is
λ = h/p = \(\frac{1.227}{\sqrt{\mathrm{V}}}\) nm
λ = \(\frac{1.227}{\sqrt{100}}\) nm = 0.123 nm
The de Broglie wavelength associated with an electron in this case is of the order of X-ray wavelengths.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Students get through AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions 11th Lesson Electromagnetic Waves which are most likely to be asked in the exam.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions 11th Lesson Electromagnetic Waves

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Give anyone use of infrared rays. [T.S. Mar. 17; A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:

  1. Infrared radiation plays an important role in maintaining the Earth warm.
  2. Infrared lamps are used in physical therapy.
  3. Infrared detectors are used on Earth Satellites.
  4. These are used in taking photographs during conditions of fog, smoke, etc.

Question 2.
How are infrared rays produced? How they can be detected?
Answer:
Vibrations of atoms and molecules can produce infrared rays. These waves can be detected by Thermopile, Bolometer, and IR photographic film.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 3.
How are radio waves produced? How can they detect it?
Answer:
Radio waves can be produced by rapid acceleration and deceleration of electrons in aerials (conductors). These can be detected by receivers of aerials.

Question 4.
If the wave length of E.M radiation is doubled, what happens to the energy of photon ? [IPE 2016 (TS)]
Answer:
If the wave length of electromagnetic radiation is doubled, then energy will be halved because energy is inversely proportional to.wavelength of electromagnetic waves.
E = hυ = hc/λ ⇒ E ∝ 1/λ (∵ hc is a constant)

Question 5.
What is the principle of production of electromagnetic waves ?
Answer:
If the charge is accelerated both the magnetic field and electric field will change with Space and time, then electromagnetic waves are produced.

Question 6.
What is the ratio of speed of infrared rays and ultraviolet rays in vaccum ?
Answer:
The ratio of speed of infrared rays and ultraviolet rays in vacuum is 1 : 1.
All electromagnetic waves travel with same speed 3 × 108 m /s in vaccum.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 7.
What is the relation between the amplitudes of the electric and magnetic fields in free space for an electromagnetic wave ?
Answer:
E0 = CB0
Where E0 = Amplitude of electric field.
B0 = Amplitude of magnetic field.
C = velocity of light.

Question 8.
What are the applications of microwaves ? [A.P. Mar. 17; T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:

  1. Microwaves are used in Radars.
  2. Microwaves are used for cooking purposes.
  3. A radar using microwave can help in detecting the speed of automobile while in motion.

Question 9.
Microwaves are used in Radars, why ? [Mar. 14]
Answer:
As microwaves are of smaller wavelengths, hence they can be transmitted as a beam signal in a particular direction. Microwaves do not bend around the comers of any obstacle coming in their path.

Question 10.
Give two uses of infrared rays.
Answer:

  1. Infrared rays are used for producing dehydrated fruits.
  2. They are used in the secret writings on the ancient walls.
  3. They are used in green houses to keep the plants warm.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 11.
How are microwaves produced ? How can they detected ? [A.P. Mar. 16; IPE 15]
Answer:
Microwaves can be produced using Klystron valve or Magnetrons.
Microwaves can be detected using point contact diodes.

Question 12.
The charging current for a capacitor is 0.6 A. What is the displacement current across its plates ?
Answer:
i = charging current for a capacitor = 0.6 A
i = id = ε0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
∴ i = id = 0.6 A
∴ Displacement current (id) = 0.6 A.

Question 13.
What physical quantity is the same for X-rays of wavelength 10-10m, red light of wavelength 6800 Å and radiowaves of wavelength 500in ?
Answer:
The speed in vaccum is same for all the given wavelengths, which is 3 × 108 m/s.

Question 14.
A radio can tune into any station in the 7.5 MHz to 12MHz band. What is the corresponding wavelength band ?
Answer:
λ1 = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{7.5 \times 10^6}\) = 40 m
λ2 = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{12 \times 10^6}\) = 25 m
Thus wavelength band is 40m to 25m.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 15.
The amplitude of the magnetic field part of a harmonic electromagnetic wave in vaccum is B0 = 510 nT. What is the amplitude of the electric field part of the wave ?
Answer:
Here, B0 = 510nT = 510 × 10-9T
E0 = CB0 = 3 × 108 × 510 × 10-9 = 153 NC-1.

Question 16.
Define displacement current
Answer:
Displacement current (Id) is equal to ε0 times to the rate of change of electric flux. Displacement current is not the current produced due to charge carried. But it is due to varying electric flux. It is the current in the sense that it produces a magnetic field.
Id = ε0 \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{\varepsilon}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State six characteristics of electromagnetic waves.
Answer:
Characteristics of electromagnetic waves :

  1. Electromagnetic waves are produced by accelerated charges.
  2. Electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature.
  3. Electromagnetic waves donot require material medium for their propagation.
  4. Electromagnetic waves obey principle of superposition of waves.
  5. Velocity of E.M waves in vaccum depends on permittivity and permeability of free space.
  6. Electromagnetic waves carry energy and momentum.
  7. Electromagnetic waves exert pressure when they strike a surface.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 2.
What is Greenhouse effect and its contribution towards the surface temperature of earth ?
Answer:
Green house effect: Temperature of the earth increases due to the radiation emitted by
the earth is trapped by atmospheric gases like CO2, CH4, N2, chlorofluoro carbons etc., is called green house effect.

  1. Radiation from the sun enters the atmosphere and heat the objects on the earth. These heated objects emit infrared rays.
  2. These rays are reflected back to Earth’s surface and trapped in the Earth’s atmosphere. Due to this temperature of the earth increases.
  3. The layers of carbon dioxide (CO2) and low lying clouds prevent infrared rays to escape Earth’s atmosphere.
  4. Since day-by-day the amount of carbondioxide in the atmosphere increases, more • infrared rays are entrapped in the atmosphere.
  5. Hence the temperature of the Earth’s surface increases day by day.

Problems

Question 1.
A plane electromagnetic wave travels in vaccum along z-direction. What can you say about the directions of its electric and magnetic field vectors ? If the frequency of the wave is 30 MHz. What is its wavelength ?
Answer:
Electric and magnetic fields \(\overline{\mathrm{E}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\) of an electromagnetic wave must be perpendicular to the propagation of electromagnetic wave. Hence they lie in X – Y plane mutually perpendicular to each other.
Frequency of wave, v = 30MHz = 30 × 106Hz.; Velocity of light, C = 3 × 108m/s
Wavelength of the wave, λ = \(\frac{C}{V}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{30 \times 10^6}\) = 10m

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 2.
A charged particle oscillates about its mean equilibrium position with a frequency of 109 Hz. What is the frequency of the electromagnetic waves produced by the oscillator ?
Answer:
According to Maxwell, a charged particle oscillating with a frequency produces electro-magnetic waves of same frequency. Hence frequency of EM waves produced is, 109Hz.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
A parallel plate capacitor with circular plates of radius 1 m has a capacitance of 1 nF. At t = 0, It is connected for charging in series with a resistor R = 1 M Q across a 2V battery (fig)- Calculate the magnetic field at a point P halfway between the centre and the periphery of the plates, after t = 10-3 s. (The charge on the capacitor at time τ is q (t) = CV [1 – exp (-t/τ)], where the time constant τ is equal to CR.).
Solution:
The time constant of the CR circuit is τ = CR = 10-3s. Then, we have
q(t) = CV [1 – exp (-t/τ) ]
= 2 × 10-9 [1 – exp (-t /10-3)
The electric field in between the plates at time t is
E = \(\frac{q(t)}{\varepsilon_0 A}=\frac{q}{\pi \varepsilon_0}\); A = π (1)2 m2 = area of the plates.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 1
Consider now a circular loop of radius (1/2)m parallel to the plates passing through R The magnetic field B at all points on the loop is along the loop arid of the same value.
The flux ΦE through this loop is
The flux ΦE = E × area of the loop
= E × π × (\(\frac{1}{2}\))2 = \(\frac{\pi \mathrm{E}}{4}=\frac{\mathrm{q}}{4 \varepsilon_0}\)
The displacement current
id = e0 \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{1}{4} \frac{\mathrm{dq}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 0.5 × 10-6 exp (-1)
at t = 10-3s. Now, applying Ampere-Maxwell law to the loop, we get
B × 2π × (\(\frac{1}{2}\)) = m0.(ic + id) = m0(0 + id) = 0.5 × 10-6 m0 exp(-1)
or, B = 0.74 × 10-13 T.

Question 2.
A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 25 MHz travels in free space along the x – direction. At a particular point in space and time, E = \(6.3 \hat{\mathbf{j}}\) V/m. What is B at the point ?
Solution:
Using Eq. B0 = [E0/c] the magnitude of B is
B = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}}{\mathrm{c}}\)
= \(\frac{6.3 \mathrm{~V} / \mathrm{m}}{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}}\) = 2.1 × 10-8 T
To find the direction, we note that E is along y-direction and the wave propagates along x- axis. Therefore, B should be in a direction perpendicular to both x- and y-axes. Using vector algebra, E × B should be along x-direction. Since, \((+\hat{\mathrm{j}})\) × \((+\hat{\mathrm{k}})\) = i, B is along the z-direction. Thus. B = 2.1 × 10-8 \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) T

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 3.
The magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by
By = 2 × 10-7 sin (0.5 × 103 × + 1.5 × 1011 t)T.
a) What is the wavelength and frequency of the wave ?
b) Write an expression for the electric field.
Solution:
a) Comparing the given equation with
By = B0 sin \(\left[2 \pi\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\lambda}+\frac{\mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{T}}\right)\right]\)
We get, λ = \(\frac{2 \pi}{0.5 \times 10^3}\) m = 1.26 cm,
and \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}}\) = v = (1.5 × 1011)/2π = 23.9 GHz

b) E0 = B0C = 2 × 10-7 T × 3 × 108 m/s = 6 × 101 V/m
The electric field component is perpendicular to the direction of propagation and the di-rection of magnetic field. Therefore, the electric field component along the z-axis is obtained as Ez = 60 sin (0.5 × 103x + 1.5 × 1011t) V/m.

Question 4.
Light with an energy flux of 18 W/cm2 falls on a non reflecting surface at normal incidence. If the surface has an area of 20 cm2 find the average force exerted on the surface during a 30 minute time span.
Solution:
The total energy falling on the surface is
U = (18 W/cm2) × (20 cm2) × (30 × 60)
= 6.48 × 105 J
Therefore, the total momentum delivered (for complete absorption) is
P = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{\mathrm{C}}=\frac{6.48 \times 10^5 \mathrm{I}}{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}}\) = 2.16 × 10-3 kg m/s
The average force exerted on the surface is
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{2.16 \times 10^{-3}}{0.18 \times 10^4}\) = 1.2 × 10-6 N

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 5.
Calculate the electric and magnetic fields produced by the radiation coming from a 100 W bulb at a distance of 3m. Assume that the efficiency of the bulb is 2.5% and it is a point source.
Solution:
The bulb, as a point source, radiates light in all directions uniformly. At a distance of 3m, the surface area of the surrounding sphere is A = 4 πr2 = 4π (3)2 = 113m2
The intensity at this distance is
I = \(\frac{\text { Power }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{100 \mathrm{~W} \times 2.5 \%}{113 \mathrm{~m}^2}\) = 0.022 W.m2
Half of this intensity is provided by the electric field and half by the magnetic field.
\(\frac{1}{2} I=\frac{1}{2}\left(\varepsilon_0 \mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{rms}}^2 \mathrm{C}\right)\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (0.022 W/m2)
Erms = \(\sqrt{\frac{0.022}{\left(8.85 \times 10^{-12}\right)\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}}\) V/m = 2.9 V/m
The value of E found above is the root mean square value of the electric field. Since the electric field in a light beam is sinusoidal, the peak electric field, E0 is
E0 = \(\sqrt{2}\)Erms = \(\sqrt{2}\) × 2.9 V/m
= 4.07 V/m
Thus, you see that the electric field strength of the light that you use for reading is fairly large. Compare it with electric field strength of TV or FM waves, which is of the order of a few microvolts per metre.
Now, let us calculate the strength of the magnetic field. It is
Brms = \(\frac{E_{\mathrm{rms}}}{\mathrm{C}}=\frac{2.9 \mathrm{Vm}^{-1}}{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}\) = 9.6 × 10-9 T.
Again, since tbs field in the light beam is sinusoidal, the peak magnetic field is B0 = \(\sqrt{2}\) Brms = 1.4 × 10-8 T. Note that although the energy in the magnetic field is equal to the energy in the electric field, the magnetic field strength is evidently very weak.